This is a modern-English version of French Polishing and Enamelling: A Practical Work of Instruction, originally written by Bitmead, Richard.
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.
FRENCH POLISHING
AND
AND
ENAMELLING
A Practical Work of Instruction
INCLUDING
NUMEROUS RECIPES FOR MAKING POLISHES, VARNISHES, GLAZE-LACQUERS, REVIVERS, ETC.
NUMEROUS RECIPES FOR MAKING POLISHES, VARNISHES, GLAZE-LACQUERS, REVIVERS, ETC.
By RICHARD BITMEAD
AUTHOR OF "THE CABINET-MAKER'S GUIDE," "THE UPHOLSTERER'S GUIDE," ETC.
Fourth Edition
4th Edition
LONDON
CROSBY LOCKWOOD AND SON
7, STATIONERS' HALL COURT, LUDGATE HILL
1910
LONDON
CROSBY LOCKWOOD AND SON
7, STATIONERS' HALL COURT, LUDGATE HILL
1910
[All rights reserved]
PRINTED BY WILLIAM CLOWES AND SONS, LIMITED, LONDON AND BECCLES.
PRINTED BY WILLIAM CLOWES AND SONS, LIMITED, LONDON AND BECCLES.
AUTHOR'S PREFACE.
Early in the present century the method generally adopted for polishing furniture was by rubbing with beeswax and turpentine or with linseed-oil. That process, however, was never considered to be very satisfactory, which fact probably led to experiments being made for the discovery of an improvement. The first intimation of success in this direction appeared in the Mechanic's Magazine of November 22, 1823, and ran as follows: "The Parisians have now introduced an entirely new mode of polishing, which is called plaque, and is to wood precisely what plating is to metal. The wood by some process is made to resemble marble, and has all the beauty of that article with much of its solidity. It is even asserted by persons who have made trial of the new mode that water may be spilled upon it without staining it." Such was the announcementvi of an invention which was destined ultimately to become a new industry.
Early in the 21st century, the common method for polishing furniture involved rubbing with beeswax and turpentine or linseed oil. However, this technique was never seen as very effective, which likely prompted efforts to find a better solution. The first sign of success in this area appeared in the Mechanic's Magazine on November 22, 1823, which stated: "Parisians have now introduced a completely new way of polishing, called plaque, which makes wood similar to what plating does for metal. Through some process, wood is made to look like marble and has all the beauty of that material along with much of its durability. It’s even claimed by those who have tried this new method that water can be spilled on it without leaving a stain." Such was the announcementvi of an invention that was destined to eventually become a new industry.
The following pages commence with a description of the art of French Polishing in its earliest infancy, care having been taken by the Author, to the best of his ability, to note all the new processes and manipulations, as well as to concisely and perspicuously arrange and describe the various materials employed, not only for French polishing but for the improving and preparation of furniture woods, a matter of great importance to the polisher. The arts of Staining and Imitating, whereby inferior woods are made to resemble the most costly, are also fully treated, as well as the processes of Enamelling, both in oil-varnishes and French polish, together with the method of decorating the same. The condition of the art of polishing in America is dwelt upon, and various interesting articles written by practical polishers in the States, which appeared in their trade journal, The Cabinet-maker, have been revised and printed in this work.
The following pages begin with a description of the art of French Polishing in its earliest stages. The Author has made every effort to note all the new methods and techniques, as well as to concisely and clearly organize and describe the various materials used, not only for French polishing but also for improving and preparing furniture woods, which is very important for the polisher. The techniques of Staining and Imitating, which make cheaper woods look like more expensive ones, are also fully covered, along with the processes of Enameling, both in oil varnishes and French polish, including the methods for decorating them. The state of the art of polishing in America is discussed, and several interesting articles written by practical polishers in the States, which were published in their trade journal, The Cabinet-maker, have been updated and included in this work.
A number of valuable recipes, and other instructive matter, useful alike to the amateur and to the practical workman, are also given.
A collection of valuable recipes and other helpful information, useful for both the beginner and the skilled worker, is also included.
CONTENTS.
CHAPTER I.THE IMPROVING AND PREPARATION OF FURNITURE WOODS. | |
PAGE | |
Improving | 2 |
Matching | 3 |
Painting | 5 |
Dyed Polishes | 6 |
| |
Imitation Mahogany | 8 |
Imitation Rosewood | 8 |
Imitation Walnut | 9 |
Imitation Ebony | 10 |
Imitation Oak | 11 |
Imitation Satin-wood | 12 |
A Blue Stain | 13 |
A Green Stain | 13 |
A Purple Stain | 13 |
A Red Stain | 14 |
Imitation Purple-wood Stain | 14 |
Chemicals used in Staining | 15 |
Process of Staining | 16 |
Ready-made Wood Stains | 17 |
| |
The Polish Used | 18 |
Rubbers | 22 |
Position | 24 |
Filling-in | 25viii |
Applying the Polish | 26 |
Spiriting-off | 30 |
Prepared Spirits | 32 |
Antique Style | 32 |
Dull or Egg-shell Polish | 33 |
Polishing in the Lathe | 34 |
| |
Glazing | 37 |
Stencilling | 39 |
Charcoal Polishing | 40 |
| |
RE-POLISHING OLD WORK | 42 |
| |
Varnishes | 46 |
Brushes and Pencils | 47 |
Mode of Operation | 47 |
East Indian Varnishes | 48 |
| |
Remarks on Polishing | 51 |
The Polishing Shop | 52 |
| |
Materials | 57 |
Tools | 58 |
Mode of Operation | 58 |
Polishing | 60 |
Another Process | 61 |
Decorations | 63 |
ix
| |
Use of Fillers | 65 |
Making Fillers | 70 |
Japan at Its Best | 70 |
Fillings for Light Wood | 70 |
Another for Light Woods | 70 |
For Mahogany or Cherry Wood | 71 |
For Oakwood | 71 |
For Rosewood | 71 |
For Black Walnut (1) | 71 |
(2) | 71 |
An Oil Color for Black Walnut (3) | 72 |
Finishing | 73 |
Black Walnut Finishing | 75 |
Finishing Veneered Panels, etc. | 78 |
Light Woods (Dead End) | 79 |
Mahogany or Cherry Wood | 79 |
Oak | 79 |
Rosewood, Coromandel, or Kingwood (a Bright Finish) | 79 |
Walnut | 80 |
Finishing Cheap Work | 81 |
With One Coat of Finish | 81 |
Wax Finish | 82 |
A Varnish Finish | 82 |
With Copal or Zanzibar Paint | 83 |
Polishing Varnish | 85 |
An American Polish Reviver | 86 |
| |
Oil Polish | 87 |
Wax Polish | 87 |
Waterproof French Polish | 88 |
Varnish for Musical Instruments | 88 |
French Varnish for Cabinet-work | 89 |
Mastic Varnish | 89 |
Cabinet-maker's Varnish | 90 |
Amber Varnish | 90 |
Colourless Varnish with Copal | 90 |
Seedlac Varnish | 91 |
Patent Varnish for Wood or Canvas | 91 |
Copal Varnish | 91 |
Carriage Varnish | 92 |
Transparent Varnish0x | 92 |
Crystal Varnish for Maps, etc. | 92 |
Black Varnish | 92 |
Black Polish | 93 |
Varnish for Iron | 93 |
Varnish for Tools | 93 |
To Make Labels Adhere to a Polished Surface | 94 |
To Remove French Polish or Varnish from Old Work | 94 |
Colouring for Carcase Work | 94 |
Cheap but Valuable Stain for the Sap of Black Walnut | 95 |
Polish (American) for Removing Stains, etc., from Furniture | 96 |
Walnut Stain to be used on Pine and White-wood | 96 |
Rosewood Stain | 97 |
Rosewood Stain for Cane Work, etc. | 97 |
French Polish Reviver | 98 |
Morocco Leather Reviver | 98 |
Hair-cloth Reviver | 99 |
To Remove Grease Stains from Silks, Damasks, Cloth, etc. | 99 |
To Remove Ink Stains from White Marble | 99 |
| |
Alkanet-root | 100 |
Madder-root | 100 |
Red-sanders | 101 |
Logwood | 101 |
Fustic | 102 |
Turmeric | 102 |
Indigo | 103 |
Persian Berries | 103 |
Nut-galls | 103 |
Catechu | 103 |
Thus | 104 |
Sandarach | 104 |
Mastic | 104 |
Benzoin | 104 |
Copal | 105 |
Dragon's Blood | 106 |
Shellac | 106 |
Amber | 107 |
Pumice-stone | 107 |
Linseed-oil | 108 |
Venice Turpentine | 110 |
Oil of Turpentine | 110 |
Methylated Spirits | 110 |
CHAPTER I.
THE IMPROVING AND PREPARATION OF FURNITURE WOODS.
For a French polisher to be considered a good workman he should, in addition to his ordinary ability to lay on a good polish, possess considerable knowledge of the various kinds of wood used for furniture, as well as the most approved method of bringing out to the fullest extent their natural tones or tints; he should also be able to improve the inferior kinds of wood, and to stain, bleach, or match any of the fancy materials to which his art is applied, in a manner that will produce the greatest perfection. The following information is given to facilitate a thorough knowledge of the above processes.
For a French polisher to be seen as a skilled craftsman, he should not only have the regular ability to apply a quality polish but also possess a solid understanding of the different types of wood used in furniture, along with the best methods to enhance their natural colors or shades. He should also be capable of improving lower-quality woods and be able to stain, bleach, or match any decorative materials he works with to achieve the highest level of perfection. The following information is provided to help gain a comprehensive understanding of these processes.
Improving.—Iron filings added to a decoction of gall-nuts and vinegar will give to ebony which has been discoloured an intense black, after brushing over once or twice. Walnut or poor-coloured rosewood can be improved by boiling half an ounce of walnut-shell extract and the same quantity of catechu in a quart of soft-water, and applying with a sponge. Half a pound of walnut husks and a like quantity of oak bark boiled in half a gallon of water will produce much the same result. Common mahogany can be improved by rubbing it with powdered red-chalk (ruddle) and a woollen rag, or by first wiping the surface with liquid ammonia, and red-oiling afterwards. For a rich mild red colour, rectified spirits of naphtha, dyed with camwood dust, or an oily decoction of alkanet-root. Methylated spirits and a small quantity of dragon's blood will also produce a mild red. Any yellow wood can be improved by an alcoholic solution of Persian berries, fustic, turmeric, or gamboge. An aqueous decoction of barberry-root will serve the same purpose. Birch when preferred a warm tint may be sponged with oil, very slightly tinted with rose-madder or Venetian red; the greatest care should be used, or it will be rendered unnatural in appearance by becoming too red. Maple which is of a dirty-brown colour, or of a cold grey tint, and mahogany, ash, oak, or any of the light-coloured woods, can be whitened by the bleaching fluid (see "Matching"). Numerous materials 3may be improved by the aid of raw linseed-oil mixed with a little spirits of turpentine. Artificial graining may be given to various woods by means of a camel-hair pencil and raw oil; two or three coats should be given, and after standing for some time the ground should have one coat of oil much diluted with spirits of turpentine, and then rubbed off.
Improving.—Adding iron filings to a mixture of gall-nuts and vinegar will bring a deep black color back to discolored ebony after brushing it one or two times. Walnut or poorly colored rosewood can be enhanced by boiling half an ounce of walnut-shell extract with the same amount of catechu in a quart of soft water and applying it with a sponge. Boiling half a pound of walnut husks and an equal amount of oak bark in half a gallon of water will yield similar results. Common mahogany can be improved by rubbing it with powdered red chalk (ruddle) and a wool cloth, or by first cleaning the surface with liquid ammonia and then applying red oil. For a rich mild red color, use rectified spirits of naphtha dyed with camwood dust, or an oily mixture of alkanet root. Methylated spirits with a small amount of dragon's blood will also create a mild red. Any yellow wood can be enhanced using an alcoholic solution of Persian berries, fustic, turmeric, or gamboge. An aqueous mixture of barberry root will serve the same purpose. If birch is desired in a warm tint, it can be sponged with oil very slightly tinted with rose-madder or Venetian red; caution is essential to avoid making it look unnatural by becoming too red. Maple that has a dirty brown color or a cold gray tint, along with mahogany, ash, oak, or any light-colored woods, can be whitened using bleaching fluid (see "Matching"). Numerous materials 3may be improved by mixing raw linseed oil with a little turpentine. Artificial graining can be applied to various woods with a camel-hair brush and raw oil; two or three coats should be applied, and after letting it sit for a while, the ground should receive one coat of oil diluted with turpentine, then rubbed off.
Matching.—Old mahogany furniture which has been repaired may be easily matched by wiping over the new portions with water in which a nodule of lime has been dissolved, or by common soda and water. The darkeners for general use are dyed oils, logwood, aquafortis, sulphate of iron, and nitrate of silver, with exposure to the sun's rays. For new furniture in oak, ash, maple, etc., the process of matching requires care and skill. When it is desirable to render all the parts in a piece of furniture of one uniform tone or tint, bleach the dark parts with a solution of oxalic acid dissolved in hot water (about two-pennyworth of acid to half a pint of water is a powerful solution); when dry, if this should not be sufficient, apply the white stain (see pp. 11, 12) delicately toned down, or the light parts may be oiled. For preserving the intermediate tones, coat them with white polish by means of a camel-hair pencil. On numerous woods, carbonate of soda and bichromate of potash are very effective as darkeners, as are also other preparations of an 4acid or alkaline nature, but the two given above are the best.
Matching.—Old mahogany furniture that has been repaired can be easily matched by wiping the new sections with water mixed with dissolved lime, or with a solution of common soda and water. The common darkening agents are dyed oils, logwood, aquafortis, sulfate of iron, and nitrate of silver, especially when exposed to sunlight. When it comes to new furniture made from oak, ash, maple, etc., the matching process requires care and skill. If you want all parts of a piece of furniture to have the same color or shade, you can lighten the dark parts using a solution of oxalic acid in hot water (about two pence worth of acid to half a pint of water makes a strong solution). Once dry, if that isn’t enough, you can apply a delicately toned down white stain (see pp. 11, 12) or oil the lighter parts. To maintain the intermediate shades, coat them with white polish using a camel-hair pencil. For many types of wood, carbonate of soda and bichromate of potash are also very effective as darkeners, along with other acid or alkaline solutions, but the two mentioned above are the best.
A good way of preparing these darkeners, says the "French Polisher's Manual," an excellent little work published in Perth some years since, is to procure twopennyworth of carbonate of soda in powder, and dissolve it in half a pint of boiling water; then have ready three bottles, and label them one, two, three. Into one put half the solution, and into the other two half a gill each; to number two add an additional gill of water, and to number three two gills. Then get the same quantity of bichromate of potash, and prepare it in a like manner; you will then have six staining fluids for procuring a series of brown and dark tints suitable for nearly all classes of wood.
A good way to prepare these darkeners, according to the "French Polisher's Manual," a great little book published in Perth several years ago, is to get a couple of pennies' worth of powdered carbonate of soda and dissolve it in half a pint of boiling water. Then, get three bottles ready and label them one, two, and three. In the first bottle, pour in half of the solution, and in the other two, pour in half a gill each; for bottle number two, add an extra gill of water, and for bottle number three, add two gills. Next, take the same amount of bichromate of potash and prepare it in the same way; you will then have six staining solutions to create a range of brown and dark shades suitable for almost all types of wood.
The bichromate of potash is useful to darken oak, walnut, beech, or mahogany, but if applied to ash it renders it of a greenish cast. If a sappy piece of walnut should be used either in the solid or veneer, darken it to match the ground colour, and then fill in the dark markings with a feather and the black stain (see pp. 10, 11). The carbonate solutions are generally used for dark surfaces, such as rosewood represents, and a still darker shade can be given to any one by oiling over after the stain is dry. The better way of using these chemical stains is to pour out into a saucer as much as will serve the purpose, and to apply it quickly with a sponge rubbed rapidly and evenly over the surface, and rubbed off dry 5immediately with old rags. Dark and light portions, between which the contrast is slight, may be made to match by varnishing the former and darkening the latter with oil, which should remain on it sufficiently long; by this means the different portions may frequently be made to match without having recourse to bleaching or staining.
The bichromate of potash is great for darkening oak, walnut, beech, or mahogany, but if you use it on ash, it will turn greenish. If you're working with a sappy piece of walnut, whether solid or veneer, darken it to match the base color, then fill in the dark markings with a feather and black stain (see pp. 10, 11). The carbonate solutions are typically used for dark surfaces like rosewood, and you can achieve an even darker shade by applying oil after the stain has dried. The best way to use these chemical stains is to pour out only what you need into a saucer, then quickly apply it with a sponge, rubbing it evenly over the surface and then wiping it off immediately with old rags. For dark and light areas where the contrast is subtle, you can make them match by varnishing the darker parts and darkening the lighter ones with oil, allowing the oil to sit for a while. This way, you can often make different sections blend without needing to bleach or stain them. 5
Painting.—The next process is painting. It frequently happens in cabinet work that a faulty place is not discovered until after the work is cleaned off; the skill of the polisher is then required to paint it to match the other. A box containing the following colours in powder will be found of great utility, and when required for use they should be mixed with French polish and applied with a brush. The pigments most suitable are: drop black, raw sienna, raw and burnt umber, Vandyke brown, French Naples yellow (bear in mind that this is a very opaque pigment), cadmium yellow, madder carmine (these are expensive), flake white, and light or Venetian red; before mixing, the colours should be finely pounded. The above method of painting, however, has this objection for the best class of furniture, that the effects of time will darken the body of the piece of furniture, whilst the painted portion will remain very nearly its original colour. In first-class work, therefore, stained polishes or varnishes should be applied instead of these pigments. 6
Painting.—The next step is painting. In cabinet work, it often happens that a flaw isn’t noticed until after the piece is cleaned; that’s when the skill of the polisher is needed to paint it to match the rest. A box with the following colors in powder form will be very useful, and when you need to use them, they should be mixed with French polish and applied with a brush. The most suitable pigments are: drop black, raw sienna, raw and burnt umber, Vandyke brown, French Naples yellow (note that this is a very opaque pigment), cadmium yellow, madder carmine (these are pricier), flake white, and light or Venetian red; before mixing, the colors should be finely ground. However, this method of painting has a downside for high-quality furniture: over time, the body of the furniture will darken, while the painted part will stay close to its original color. Therefore, for top-quality work, stained polishes or varnishes should be used instead of these pigments. 6
Dyed Polishes.—The methods of dyeing polish or varnish are as follows: for a red, put a little alkanet-root or camwood dust into a bottle containing polish or varnish; for a bright yellow, a small piece of aloes; for a yellow, ground turmeric or gamboge; for a brown, carbonate of soda and a very small quantity of dragon's blood; and for a black, a few logwood chips, gall-nuts, and copperas, or by the addition of gas-black.
Dyed Polishes.—The methods for dyeing polish or varnish are as follows: for red, add a bit of alkanet root or camwood dust into a bottle of polish or varnish; for bright yellow, include a small piece of aloes; for yellow, use ground turmeric or gamboge; for brown, mix in carbonate of soda and a tiny amount of dragon's blood; and for black, add some logwood chips, gall-nuts, and copperas, or include gas-black.
The aniline dyes (black excepted) are very valuable for dyeing polishes, the most useful being Turkey-red, sultan red, purple, and brown. A small portion is put into the polish, which soon dissolves it, and no straining is required. The cheapest way to purchase these dyes is by the ounce or half-ounce. The penny packets sold by chemists are too expensive, although a little goes a long way.
The aniline dyes (except for black) are really useful for dyeing polishes, with the best ones being Turkey-red, sultan red, purple, and brown. A small amount is added to the polish, which dissolves quickly, so no straining is needed. The most economical way to buy these dyes is by the ounce or half-ounce. The small packets sold by chemists are too pricey, even though a little bit lasts a long time.
CHAPTER II.
STAINS AND IMITATIONS.
In consequence of the high price demanded for furniture made of the costly woods, the art of the chemist has been called into requisition to produce upon the inferior woods an analogous effect at a trifling expense. The materials employed in the artificial colouring of wood are both mineral and vegetable; the mineral is the most permanent, and when caused by chemical decomposition within the pores it acts as a preservative agent in a greater or less degree. The vegetable colouring matters do not penetrate so easily, probably on account of the affinity of the woody fibre for the colouring matter, whereby the whole of the latter is taken up by the parts of the wood with which it first comes into contact. Different intermediate shades, in great variety, may be obtained by combinations of colouring matters, according to the tint desired, and the ideas of the stainer. The processes technically known as "grounding and ingraining" are partly chemical and partly mechanical, and are designed to teach the various 8modes of operation whereby the above effects can be produced. We will commence with
Due to the high price of furniture made from expensive woods, chemists have stepped in to create a similar look on cheaper woods at a low cost. The materials used for artificially coloring wood include both mineral and vegetable options; minerals are the most durable and, when they chemically break down in the wood's pores, they help preserve the material to some extent. Vegetable dyes don’t penetrate as easily, probably because the wood fibers are drawn to the dye, resulting in the dye being absorbed by the parts of the wood it first contacts. You can achieve a variety of shades by mixing different coloring agents, depending on the desired tint and the stainer's vision. The techniques known as "grounding and ingraining" involve both chemical and mechanical processes aimed at demonstrating the different ways to achieve these effects. We will start with
Imitation Mahogany.—Half a pound of madder-root, and two ounces of logwood chips boiled in a gallon of water. Brush over while hot; when dry, go over it with a solution of pearlash, a drachm to a pint. Beech or birch, brushed with aquafortis in sweeping regular strokes, and immediately dried in front of a good fire, form very good imitations of old wood. Venetian red mixed with raw linseed-oil also forms a good stain.
Imitation Mahogany.—Take half a pound of madder root and two ounces of logwood chips, and boil them in a gallon of water. Brush this mixture on while it’s hot; once dry, go over it with a solution of pearlash, at a rate of one drachm to a pint. For beech or birch, brush them with aquafortis in smooth, even strokes and then dry them quickly in front of a good fire to create convincing imitations of old wood. Venetian red mixed with raw linseed oil also makes a great stain.
The following is a method in common use by French cabinet-makers. The white wood is first brushed over with a diluted solution of nitrous acid; next, with a solution made of methylated spirits one gill, carbonate of soda three-quarters of an ounce, and dragon's blood a quarter of an ounce; and a little red tint is added to the varnish or polish used afterwards. Black American walnut can be made to imitate mahogany by brushing it over with a weak solution of nitric acid.
The following is a method commonly used by French cabinet-makers. The white wood is first brushed with a diluted solution of nitrous acid. Next, a mixture is made of one gill of methylated spirits, three-quarters of an ounce of carbonate of soda, and a quarter of an ounce of dragon's blood. A little red tint is added to the varnish or polish used afterwards. Black American walnut can be made to look like mahogany by brushing it with a weak solution of nitric acid.
Imitation Rosewood.—Boil half a pound of logwood chips in three pints of water until the decoction is a very dark red; then add an ounce of salt of tartar. Give the work three coats boiling hot; then with a graining tool or a feather fill in the dark markings with the black stain. 9A stain of a very bright shade can be made with methylated spirits half a gallon, camwood three-quarters of a pound, red-sanders a quarter of a pound, extract of logwood half a pound, aquafortis one ounce. When dissolved, it is ready for use. This makes a very bright ground. It should be applied in three coats over the whole surface, and when dry it is glass-papered down with fine paper to a smooth surface, and is then ready for graining. The fibril veins are produced by passing a graining tool with a slight vibratory motion, so as to effect the natural-looking streaks, using the black stain. A coat of the bichromate of potash solution referred to on page 4 will make wildly-figured mahogany have the appearance of rosewood.
Imitation Rosewood.—Boil half a pound of logwood chips in three pints of water until the mixture turns a very dark red; then add an ounce of cream of tartar. Apply three coats while it's boiling hot; then use a graining tool or a feather to fill in the dark markings with black stain. 9A bright stain can be made with half a gallon of methylated spirits, three-quarters of a pound of camwood, a quarter of a pound of red-sanders, half a pound of logwood extract, and one ounce of aquafortis. Once dissolved, it's ready to use. This creates a very bright base. It should be applied in three coats over the entire surface, and once dry, it can be sanded down with fine paper for a smooth finish, making it ready for graining. The fibrous veins are created by moving a graining tool with a slight vibrating motion to create natural-looking streaks with the black stain. A coat of the bichromate of potash solution mentioned on page 4 will make wildly-figured mahogany look like rosewood.
Imitation Walnut.—A mixture of two parts of brown umber and one part of sulphuric acid, with spirits of wine or methylated spirits added until it is sufficiently fluid, will serve for white wood. Showy elm-wood, after being delicately darkened with the bichromate solution No. 1, page 4, will pass for walnut; it is usually applied on the cheap loo-table pillars, which are made of elm-wood. Equal portions of the bichromate and carbonate solutions (see page 4), used upon American pine, will have a very good effect.
Imitation Walnut.—Mix two parts brown umber with one part sulfuric acid, and add spirits of wine or methylated spirits until it’s fluid enough to use for white wood. For a flashy look, treat elm wood with a light darkening using bichromate solution No. 1, found on page 4, and it will resemble walnut. This technique is typically used on inexpensive loo-table pillars made from elm wood. Equal parts of bichromate and carbonate solutions (see page 4) applied to American pine will create a great effect.
Another method for imitating walnut is as follows: One part (by weight) of walnut-shell extract is dissolved in six parts of soft-water, and 10slowly heated to boiling until the solution is complete. The surface to be stained is cleaned and dried, and the solution applied once or twice; when half-dry, the whole is gone over again with one part of chromate of potash boiled in five parts of water. It is then dried, rubbed down, and polished in the ordinary way.
Another way to mimic walnut is as follows: One part (by weight) of walnut-shell extract is dissolved in six parts of soft water, and 10slowly heated to a boil until the solution is complete. The surface to be stained is cleaned and dried, and the solution is applied once or twice; when it's half dry, the whole thing is gone over again with one part of potassium chromate boiled in five parts of water. It is then dried, smoothed down, and polished like usual.
The extract of walnut-shells and chromate of potash are procurable at any large druggist's establishment. A dark-brown is the result of the action of copper salts on the yellow prussiate of potash; the sulphate of copper in soft woods gives a pretty reddish-brown colour, in streaks and shades, and becomes very rich after polishing or varnishing. Different solutions penetrate with different degrees of facility. In applying, for instance, acetate of copper and prussiate of potash to larch, the sap-wood is coloured most when the acetate is introduced first; but when the prussiate is first introduced, the heart-wood is the most deeply coloured. Pyrolignite of iron causes a dark-grey colour in beech, from the action and tannin in the wood on the oxide of iron; while in larch it merely darkens the natural colour. Most of the tints, especially those caused by the prussiates of iron and copper, are improved by the exposure to light, and the richest colours are produced when the process is carried out rapidly.
The extract of walnut shells and potassium chromate are available at any large pharmacy. A dark brown results from the interaction of copper salts with potassium ferrocyanide; the copper sulfate used on softwoods produces a nice reddish-brown color in streaks and shades, which becomes very rich after polishing or varnishing. Different solutions penetrate the wood with varying ease. For example, when applying copper acetate and potassium ferrocyanide to larch, the sapwood gets the most color if the acetate is applied first; however, if the ferrocyanide is applied first, the heartwood gets the deepest color. Pyroliginate of iron creates a dark grey color in beech due to the action of tannin in the wood on iron oxide, while in larch, it just darkens the natural color. Most of the shades, especially those created by iron and copper ferrocyanides, improve with exposure to light, and the richest colors are achieved when the process is done quickly.
Imitation Ebony.—Take half a gallon of strong vinegar, one pound of extract of logwood, 11a quarter of a pound of copperas, two ounces of China blue, and one ounce of nut-gall. Put these into an iron pot, and boil them over a slow fire till they are well dissolved. When cool, the mixture is ready for use. Add a gill of iron filings steeped in vinegar. The above makes a perfect jet black, equal to the best black ebony. A very good black is obtained by a solution of sulphate of copper and nitric acid; when dry, the work should have a coat of strong logwood stain.
Imitation Ebony.—Take half a gallon of strong vinegar, one pound of logwood extract, 11a quarter of a pound of copperas, two ounces of China blue, and one ounce of nut-gall. Put these into an iron pot and boil them over a low heat until they are fully dissolved. When cool, the mixture is ready to use. Add a gill of iron filings that have been soaked in vinegar. This will create a perfect jet black, equivalent to the best black ebony. You can also achieve a very good black by using a solution of copper sulfate and nitric acid; when dry, the work should be coated with a strong logwood stain.
Imitation Oak.—To imitate old oak, the process known as "fumigating" is the best. This is produced by two ounces of American potash and two ounces of pearlash mixed together in a vessel containing one quart of hot water.
Imitation Oak.—To mimic old oak, the best method is known as "fumigating." This is made by mixing two ounces of American potash and two ounces of pearlash in a container with one quart of hot water.
Another method is by dissolving a lump of bichromate of potash in warm water; the tint can be varied by adding more water. This is best done out of doors in a good light. Very often in sending for bichromate of potash a mistake is made, and chromate of potash is procured instead; this is of a yellow colour, and will not answer the purpose. The bichromate of potash is the most powerful, and is of a red colour. A solution of asphaltum in spirits of turpentine is frequently used to darken new oak which is intended for painter's varnish, or a coating of boiled oil.
Another method is to dissolve a chunk of potassium bichromate in warm water; you can adjust the color by adding more water. It's best to do this outdoors in good lighting. Often, when ordering potassium bichromate, a mistake happens, and potassium chromate is mistakenly obtained instead; this one is yellow and won't work for the intended use. Potassium bichromate is the strongest option and has a red color. A solution of asphalt in turpentine is often used to darken new oak that's meant for painter's varnish or a layer of boiled oil.
Another method of imitating new oak upon any of the inferior light-coloured woods is to give the surface a coat of Stephens's satin-wood stain, and 12to draw a soft graining-comb gently over it, and when the streaky appearance is thus produced a camel-hair pencil should be taken and the veins formed with white stain. This is made by digesting three-quarters of an ounce of flake white (subnitrate of bismuth), and about an ounce of isinglass in two gills of boiling water; it can be made thinner by adding more water, or can be slightly tinted if desired.
Another way to mimic new oak on any of the lighter woods is to apply a coat of Stephens's satin-wood stain to the surface, and then gently run a soft graining comb over it. Once the streaky effect is created, use a camel-hair brush to add the veins with white stain. You can make this stain by dissolving three-quarters of an ounce of flake white (subnitrate of bismuth) and about an ounce of isinglass in two gills of boiling water. You can make it thinner by adding more water, or you can slightly tint it if you want.
Proficients in staining and imitating can make American ash so like oak that experienced judges are frequently deceived, the vein and shade of the spurious wood looking nearly as natural as the genuine. After the veining is done, it should be coated with white hard varnish, made rather thin by adding more spirits, after which the ground can be delicately darkened if required.
Proficients in staining and imitating can make American ash look so much like oak that experienced judges are often fooled, with the grain and color of the fake wood appearing almost as real as the authentic one. After the grain is done, it should be coated with a thin layer of white hard varnish, made thinner by adding more spirits, after which the surface can be gently darkened if needed.
Imitation Satin-wood.—Take methylated spirits one quart, ground turmeric three ounces, powdered gamboge one and a-half ounces. This mixture should be steeped to its full strength, and then strained through fine muslin, when it will be ready for use. Apply with a sponge, and give two coats; when dry, glass-paper down with fine old paper. This makes a good imitation for inside work. By the addition of a little dragon's blood an orange tint can be produced. A yellow colour can also be given to wood by boiling hot solutions of turmeric, Persian berries, fustic, etc. but the colour is very fugitive. A more per13manent colour results from nitric acid, and last of all by the successive introduction of acetate of lead and chromate of potash. Sulphate of iron also stains wood of a yellowish colour when used as a preservative agent, so much so, that the use of corrosive sublimate is recommended for this purpose when it is desirable to preserve the light colour.
Imitation Satin-wood.—Take one quart of methylated spirits, three ounces of ground turmeric, and one and a half ounces of powdered gamboge. This mixture should be steeped to its full strength, then strained through fine muslin, and it will be ready to use. Apply with a sponge and give two coats; once dry, sand down with fine paper. This makes a good imitation for interior work. By adding a little dragon's blood, you can create an orange tint. You can also give wood a yellow color by boiling hot solutions of turmeric, Persian berries, fustic, etc., but the color is very unstable. A more permanent color comes from nitric acid, and finally through the successive addition of acetate of lead and chromate of potash. Sulphate of iron also stains wood a yellowish color when used as a preservative, so much so that the use of corrosive sublimate is recommended for this purpose when you want to maintain the light color.
A Blue Stain.—This dye can be obtained by dissolving East Indian indigo in arsenious acid, which will give a dark blue. A lighter blue can be obtained by hot solutions of indigo, of sulphate of copper, and by the successive introduction of pyrolignite of iron and prussiate of potash.
A Blue Stain.—This dye can be made by dissolving East Indian indigo in arsenious acid, which produces a dark blue. A lighter blue can be achieved using hot solutions of indigo and copper sulfate, along with the step-by-step addition of iron pyrolignite and potassium prussiate.
A Green Stain.—Dissolve one ounce of Roman vitriol in a quart of boiling water, to which is added one ounce of pearlash; the mixture should then be forcibly agitated, and a small quantity of pulverised yellow arsenic stirred in. A green is also the result of successive formations in the pores of the wood of a blue and a yellow as above indicated, and by a hot solution of acetate of copper in water. A yellowish green may be obtained by the action of copper salts on the red prussiate of potash.
A Green Stain.—Dissolve one ounce of Roman vitriol in a quart of boiling water, then add one ounce of pearlash. Mix it vigorously, and then stir in a small amount of powdered yellow arsenic. A green color can also form from layering blue and yellow in the wood's pores, as mentioned above, and by using a hot solution of copper acetate in water. You can get a yellowish green by combining copper salts with red prussiate of potash.
A Purple Stain.—Boil one pound of logwood chips in three quarts of water, until the full 14strength is obtained; then add four ounces of pearlash and two ounces of powdered indigo. When these ingredients are thoroughly dissolved, it is ready for use, either hot or cold. A purple is also obtained by a boiling hot solution of logwood and Brazil-wood, one pound of the former and one quarter of a pound of the latter to a gallon of water.
A Purple Stain.—Boil one pound of logwood chips in three quarts of water until fully concentrated; then add four ounces of pearl ash and two ounces of powdered indigo. When these ingredients are completely dissolved, it’s ready to use, either hot or cold. A purple color can also be achieved by using a boiling hot solution of logwood and Brazil wood, using one pound of logwood and a quarter pound of Brazil wood in a gallon of water.
A Red Stain.—Methylated spirits one quart, Brazil-wood three ounces, dragon's blood half an ounce, cochineal half an ounce, saffron one ounce. Steep the whole to its full strength, and strain. A red can also be produced by macerating red-sanders in rectified spirits of naphtha. An orange-red colour may be obtained by the successive action of bichloride of mercury and iodide of potash, madder, and ammoniacal solutions of carmine.
A Red Stain.—One quart of methylated spirits, three ounces of Brazil wood, half an ounce of dragon's blood, half an ounce of cochineal, and one ounce of saffron. Steep everything until it reaches its full strength, and then strain. A red can also be made by soaking red sanders in purified naphtha. An orange-red color can be achieved by using bichloride of mercury and iodide of potash in turns, along with madder and ammoniacal solutions of carmine.
Imitation Purple-wood Stain.—Grind a piece of green copperas on coarse glass-paper, and mix with polish coloured with red-sanders. This makes a capital purple stain, and is used by French cabinet-makers.
Imitation Purple-wood Stain.—Grind a piece of green copperas on coarse sandpaper and mix it with polish colored with red sanders. This creates a great purple stain and is used by French cabinet makers.
These dyestuffs may be much improved by the addition of a mordant applied after they are dry; this will greatly assist in modifying and fixing the tints and shades which the dyes impart. The best thing for the purpose, in the writer's opinion, is clear ox-gall, which, besides being useful as a mordant, will destroy all unctuous matter. 15
These dyes can be significantly enhanced by adding a mordant after they've dried; this will really help in adjusting and setting the colors and shades that the dyes provide. In my opinion, the best option for this is clear ox-gall, which, in addition to serving as a mordant, will eliminate any greasy residue. 15
Chemicals used in Staining.—It may perhaps be useful here to give the common or popular names of the chemicals employed in the operations of staining and imitating, as few polishers know them by the scientific names used by chemists:—
Chemicals used in Staining.—It might be helpful to list the common or popular names of the chemicals used in staining and imitation, since most polishers are not familiar with the scientific names that chemists use:—
Nitric acid is but another phrase for aquafortis.
Sulphuric acid, for oil of vitriol.
Ammonia, for spirits of hartshorn.
Sulphate of magnesia, for Epsom salts.
Nitrate of potass, for sal prunelle.
Chlorine, for aqua regia.
Sulphate of copper, for blue vitriol.
Subborate of soda, for borax.
Superoxalate of potass, for salts of sorrel.
Hydrochlorate of ammonia, for sal ammoniac.
Subnitrate of bismuth, for flake white.
Acetic acid, for vinegar.
Acetate of lead, for sugar of lead.
Sulphate of lime, for gypsum.
Carbonate of potass, for pearlash.
Bitartrate of potass, for cream of tartar.
Nitrate of silver, for lunar caustic.
Supercarbonate of iron, for plumbago.
Cyanide of iron, for Prussian blue.
Subacetate of copper, for common verdigris.
Susquecarbonate of ammonia, for sal volatile.
Alcohol, for pure spirit.
Sulphate of iron, for green copperas.
Sulphate of zinc, for white copperas.
Nitric acid is just another name for aquafortis.
Sulfuric acid is the same as oil of vitriol.
Ammonia is also known as spirits of hartshorn.
Sulphate of magnesia is referred to as Epsom salts.
Nitrate of potass is known as sal prunelle.
Chlorine is another term for aqua regia.
Sulphate of copper is called blue vitriol.
Subborate of soda is simply borax.
Superoxalate of potass is known as salts of sorrel.
Hydrochlorate of ammonia is called sal ammoniac.
Subnitrate of bismuth is referred to as flake white.
Acetic acid is vinegar.
Acetate of lead is also known as sugar of lead.
Sulphate of lime is called gypsum.
Carbonate of potass is known as pearlash.
Bitartrate of potass is referred to as cream of tartar.
Nitrate of silver is called lunar caustic.
Supercarbonate of iron is known as plumbago.
Cyanide of iron is referred to as Prussian blue.
Subacetate of copper is commonly known as verdigris.
Susquecarbonate of ammonia is called sal volatile.
Alcohol is known as pure spirit.
Sulphate of iron is referred to as green copperas.
Sulphate of zinc is known as white copperas.
16Process of Staining.—The natural qualities of woods are very variable; so also are the textures of the different sorts usually used for staining. It will be readily perceived that there is no fixed principle upon which certain peculiar tints or shades can be produced with any degree of certainty. In order to arrive at the best results, the stainer is recommended to observe the following rules:—
16Process of Staining.—The natural characteristics of wood can vary a lot, just like the textures of the different types typically used for staining. It's clear that there isn't a set method for consistently producing specific hues or shades. To achieve the best outcomes, it's advised that the stainer follows these guidelines:—
All dry stuffs are best reduced to powder, when it is possible, before macerating or dissolving them.
All dry ingredients are best ground into powder, if possible, before soaking or dissolving them.
All liquids should be strained or filtered before use.
All liquids should be strained or filtered before using.
The requisite ingredients should always be tested before a free use is made of them, as the effect produced by a coat of stain cannot be accurately ascertained until it is thoroughly dry.
The necessary ingredients should always be tested before using them freely, as the effect of a coat of stain can't be accurately determined until it's completely dry.
Amateurs in staining had far better coat twice or thrice with a weak stain than apply a strong one; for if too dark a tint is first obtained it is often irremediable. Flat surfaces will take stain more evenly if a small portion of linseed-oil is first wiped over, well rubbed off, and allowed to dry, then lightly papered down with fine glass-paper. End-way wood which is of a spongy nature should first have a coat of thin varnish, and when dry well glass-papered off. For applying stain a flat hog-hair tool is the best; and for a softener-down a badger-hair tool is used. For mahogany shades and tints a mottler will be found of service, as will also a soft piece of Turkey sponge. For oak, 17the usual steel graining-comb is employed for the streaking, and for veining badger sash-tools and sable pencils.
Amateurs in staining are better off applying two or three coats of a weak stain rather than one strong coat; if a dark color is achieved too early, it can often be impossible to correct. Flat surfaces will absorb stain more evenly if a small amount of linseed oil is wiped on first, rubbed off well, and allowed to dry, followed by gently sanding with fine sandpaper. For end-grain wood, which is spongy, it's best to apply a coat of thin varnish first, then sand it down when dry. A flat hog-hair brush is the best tool for applying stain, while a badger-hair brush is used for softening the finish. For mahogany shades and tints, a mottler is useful, along with a soft piece of Turkey sponge. For oak, 17 a steel graining comb is typically used for streaking, and for veining, badger sash tools and sable pencils are recommended.
Ready-made Wood Stains.—There are numerous stains suitable for common work in the market obtainable at a small cost by residents in London, but it is cheaper for those who reside in country towns to make their own, if only a small quantity is required. The principal makers of wood stains are H. C. Stephens, of 191, Aldersgate-street, E.C., and Jackson, 213, Union-street, Southwark, S.E. These makers prepare stains in a liquid state, and also in powders for oak, walnut, mahogany, satin-wood, ebony, and rosewood. The powders are sold in packages at 8s. per lb. or 1s. for two ounces, and are soluble in boiling water. Judson, of 77, Southwark-street, S.E., makes a mahogany powder in sixpenny packets, and any reliable oilman will sell a good black stain at 8d. per quart, or a superior black stain at 1s. 2d. per quart. Fox, of 109, Bethnal Green-road, also prepares stains in a liquid state.18
Ready-made Wood Stains.—There are many stains available for everyday projects in the market at a low cost for people living in London, but it's more economical for those in rural areas to make their own if they only need a small amount. The main manufacturers of wood stains are H. C. Stephens, located at 191 Aldersgate Street, E.C., and Jackson at 213 Union Street, Southwark, S.E. These companies offer stains in both liquid and powder forms suitable for oak, walnut, mahogany, satinwood, ebony, and rosewood. The powders are sold in packages at 8s. per lb. or 1s. for two ounces, and they dissolve in boiling water. Judson, at 77 Southwark Street, S.E., sells a mahogany powder in sixpenny packets, and any trustworthy oil supplier will provide a good black stain at 8d. per quart, or a premium black stain at 1s. 2d. per quart. Fox, at 109 Bethnal Green Road, also offers stains in liquid form.18
CHAPTER III.
FRENCH POLISHING.
The Polish Used.—The oil or wax polish was used for all kinds of furniture before the introduction of French polish, the invention of which, as its name implies, is due to French cabinet-makers. It was first introduced into England about seventy years since; some time elapsed, however, before it was brought to a high state of perfection. At first apprentices or porters were entrusted with the polishing, they having been usually called upon to do the wax polishing; but in course of time it was found that its successful adoption implied the possession of considerable skill, and it came to be regarded as an art of no little importance—so much so, that the early polishers who had perfected themselves used to work in a shop with closed doors, lest the secret of their success should be discovered. From that time polishing became a separate branch of the cabinet business.
The Polish Used.—Before the introduction of French polish, oil or wax polish was used for all types of furniture. As the name suggests, the invention of French polish comes from French cabinet-makers. It was first introduced in England about seventy years ago; however, there was a time before it was refined to a high standard. Initially, apprentices or porters were responsible for polishing, as they were typically asked to do the wax polishing. Over time, it became clear that successfully applying it required significant skill, and it started to be viewed as a valuable art form—so much so that the early polishers who mastered it worked in shops with closed doors to keep their techniques a secret. From then on, polishing became a distinct part of the cabinet-making industry.
"French Polish."
Gum sandarach | 14 ounces 2 drachms |
Gum mastic in drops | 7 " 2 " |
Shellac (the yellower the better) | 14 " 2 " |
Alcohol of 0.8295 specific gravity | 3 quarts and 1 pint. |
"Pound the resinous gums, and effect their solution by continued agitation, without the aid of heat; if the woods are porous, add seven ounces one drachm of Venice turpentine. If an equal weight of ground glass be added, the solution is more quickly made, and is also otherwise benefited by it. Before using, the wood should be made to imbibe a little linseed-oil, the excess of which should be removed by an old flannel."
"Pound the resinous gums and mix them thoroughly without using heat. If the woods are porous, add seven ounces plus one drachm of Venice turpentine. If you add an equal weight of ground glass, the mixture will come together faster and will also have other benefits. Before using it, the wood should soak up some linseed oil, and any excess should be wiped off with an old flannel."
Notwithstanding the improvement made upon the old processes by this new method, it was by no means considered to be perfect, for the polish was found to impart its brown tinge to the light-coloured woods, especially in marqueterie work, and to deteriorate their appearance. It will be readily seen that it was a great desideratum among polishers to render shellac colourless, as, with the exception of its dark-brown hue, it possesses all the properties essential to a good polish or spirit varnish in a higher degree than any of the other resins.
Despite the improvements made on the old processes by this new method, it was definitely not seen as perfect. The polish was found to give a brown tint to lighter woods, especially in marquetry work, which worsened their appearance. It was clear that it was a major goal for polishers to make shellac colorless, since, apart from its dark brown color, it has all the qualities necessary for a good polish or spirit varnish more effectively than any other resin.
In 1827 the Society of Arts came forward with its valuable aid and offered a premium of a gold 20medal, or thirty guineas, "for a polish or varnish made from shell or seed-lac, equally hard, and as fit for use in the arts as that at present prepared from the above substance, but deprived of its colouring matter." After numerous experiments, this long-felt want was perfectly attained by Dr. Hare, who was awarded the premium. His method was as follows: "Dissolve in an iron kettle one part of pearlash in about eight parts of water; add one part of shell or seed-lac, and heat the whole to ebullition. When the lac is dissolved, cool the solution, and impregnate it with chlorine till the lac is all precipitated. The precipitate is white, but its colour deepens by washing and consolidation; dissolved in alcohol, lac, bleached by the process above mentioned, yields a polish or varnish which is as free from colour as any copal varnish." At the present time shellac is bleached by filtration over animal charcoal.
In 1827, the Society of Arts stepped in with its valuable support and offered a prize of a gold 20medal, or thirty guineas, "for a polish or varnish made from shell or seed-lac, equally hard, and as suitable for use in the arts as the currently prepared material, but without its color." After numerous experiments, Dr. Hare successfully met this long-standing need and was awarded the prize. His method was as follows: "Dissolve one part of pearlash in about eight parts of water in an iron kettle; add one part of shell or seed-lac and heat the mixture to boiling. Once the lac is dissolved, cool the solution and infuse it with chlorine until the lac precipitates completely. The precipitate is white, but its color deepens with washing and consolidation; when dissolved in alcohol, the lac bleached by the above method produces a polish or varnish that is as colorless as any copal varnish." Nowadays, shellac is bleached through filtration with animal charcoal.
Numerous experiments were afterwards made in the manufacture of polishes; several chemists devoted their attention to its manufacture, and an improved polish was soon produced which was used for a number of years. The following are its proportions:—
Numerous experiments were conducted later on making polishes; several chemists focused on its production, and an improved polish was quickly developed that was utilized for many years. Here are its proportions:—
Shellac | 14 ounces. |
Sandarach | ¾ ounce. |
White resin | ¾ " |
Benzoin | ¾ " |
Gum thus | ¾ " |
O.P. finishing spirit | ½ a gallon. |
The21 "filling-in" processes also began to be used, which effected a considerable saving in the quantity of polish usually required, and in consequence of the expensiveness of spirits of wine rectified spirits of naphtha was used as a substitute for the making of polishes, etc.; but it was discovered that its continued use soon affected the eyesight of the workmen, and it had to be abandoned, the methylic alcohol, pyroxylic spirit, or wood spirit, as it has been differently called, taking its place. This was first discovered by Mr. Philip Taylor in 1812, and is obtained by distilling wood. Messrs. Dumas & Peligot, after analysing it, determined that it contained 37·5 per cent. of carbon, 12·5 per cent. of hydrogen, and 50 per cent. of oxygen. When pure, it remains clear in the atmosphere; but for the sake of economy it is often employed in the manufacture of other compounds called methylated. This spirit began to be much used in the manufacture of polishes and varnishes in the year 1848, and has continued to be much used ever since.
The21 "filling-in" processes also started being used, which led to a significant reduction in the amount of polish usually needed. Because spirits of wine were expensive, rectified naphtha was used as a substitute for making polishes, etc. However, it was found that prolonged use negatively impacted the eyesight of the workers, so it had to be abandoned. Methylic alcohol, also known as pyroxylic spirit or wood spirit, replaced it. This was first discovered by Mr. Philip Taylor in 1812 and is obtained by distilling wood. Messrs. Dumas & Peligot analyzed it and determined that it contained 37.5 percent carbon, 12.5 percent hydrogen, and 50 percent oxygen. When pure, it stays clear in the atmosphere, but for cost reasons, it's often used in the production of other compounds called methylated. This spirit became widely used for making polishes and varnishes in 1848 and has continued to be widely used ever since.
The wonderful improvements which have been effected in polishes since their first introduction obviously prove that they have now arrived at a very high point of perfection, and polishing is now justly acknowledged, both by skilled artisans and connoisseurs, to be an important decorative art. French polish or varnish at the present time can easily be obtained at most chemists or oil shops, or direct from the manufacturers, 22amongst whom may be mentioned Mr. W. Urquhart, 327, Edgware-road, W.; Messrs. Turner & Sons, 7 to 9, Broad-street, Bloomsbury, W.C.; Messrs. William Fox & Son, Bethnal Green-road, E.; Mr. G. Purdom, 49, Commercial-road, E.
The amazing advancements in polishes since they were first introduced clearly show that they've reached a very high level of perfection, and polishing is now recognized by skilled artisans and enthusiasts alike as an important decorative art. French polish or varnish can easily be found at most drugstores or hardware stores, or directly from manufacturers, 22 including Mr. W. Urquhart, 327 Edgware Road, W.; Messrs. Turner & Sons, 7 to 9 Broad Street, Bloomsbury, W.C.; Messrs. William Fox & Son, Bethnal Green Road, E.; Mr. G. Purdom, 49 Commercial Road, E.
The London prices are: Best French polish, 5s. 6d. per gallon; best white polish, 9s. per gallon; brown or white hard varnish, 8s. per gallon; patent glaze, 10s. per gallon; methylated spirits, 3s. 3d. per gallon. For those who prefer to make their own, the following will be found an excellent recipe:—
The London prices are: Best French polish, £5.30 per gallon; best white polish, £9.00 per gallon; brown or white hard varnish, £8.00 per gallon; patent glaze, £10.00 per gallon; methylated spirits, £3.15 per gallon. For those who prefer to make their own, the following will be found an excellent recipe:—
12 ounces of orange shellac.
1 ounce of benzoin.
1 ounce of sandarach.
½ gallon of methylated spirits.
12 ounces of orange shellac.
1 oz of benzoin.
1 oz of sandarach.
½ gallon of denatured alcohol.
Pound the gums well before mixing with the spirit, as this will hasten their dissolution. White polish for white wood and marqueterie work should be made with bleached shellac instead of the above. In making polishes or varnishes, the mixture will frequently require shaking until dissolved.
Pound the gums thoroughly before mixing with the spirit, as this will speed up their dissolution. White polish for white wood and marquetry should be made with bleached shellac instead of the above. When making polishes or varnishes, the mixture often needs to be shaken until fully dissolved.
Rubbers.—In commencing to polish, the materials required are old flannel for the rubbers and clean old linen or cotton rags for the coverings, the softer the better; some polishers, however, prefer white wadding for rubbers instead of flannel. Rubbers for large surfaces 23are usually made of soft old flannel, firmly and compactly put together somewhat in the form of a ball, and the more they possess softness and compactness, and are large and solid, the more quickly and satisfactorily will they polish extensive surfaces. Small pliable rubbers are usually employed for chairs or light frame-work. Perhaps for a beginner a rubber made of old flannel may be best, as it takes some little practice to obtain the necessary lightness of hand.
Rubbers.—When you start polishing, you’ll need old flannel for the rubbers and clean old linen or cotton rags for the coverings; the softer, the better. Some polishers, however, prefer to use white wadding for rubbers instead of flannel. Rubbers for large surfaces 23are typically made from soft old flannel, packed together tightly in the shape of a ball. The softer and more compact they are, and the larger and sturdier, the quicker and more effectively they will polish large areas. Small, flexible rubbers are generally used for chairs or lightweight frames. For beginners, a rubber made of old flannel might be the best choice, as it takes a bit of practice to develop the necessary light touch.
The rubber for "spiriting-off" should be made up from a piece of old flannel or woollen cloth, and covered with a piece of close rag, doubled. Carefully fold the rag and screw it round at the back to make it as firm as possible, and sprinkle some spirit on the face of it just as it is covered; then give it two or three good smacks with the palm of the hand, and begin by laying on as lightly as possible for the first few strokes and gradually increase the pressure as the rubber gets dry; then take off the first fold of the cover and work it perfectly dry.
The rubber for "spiriting-off" should be made from a piece of old flannel or wool fabric, covered with a doubled piece of close rag. Carefully fold the rag and twist it at the back to make it as tight as possible, then sprinkle some spirit on the surface just as it’s covered. Give it two or three solid smacks with the palm of your hand and start by applying it as lightly as you can for the first few strokes, gradually applying more pressure as the rubber dries. After that, remove the first layer of the cover and make sure to work it completely dry.
The rubber should present to the wood you are about to work on a smooth-rounded or convex surface. Have beside you linseed-oil in one receptacle, and some French polish in another. Apply one drop of polish and one drop of oil, and polish with a circular movement—traversing steadily the whole surface to be polished, and from time to time, as may be necessary (when the rubber gets sticky and harsh, indicating that the 24inside needs replenishing with more polish), open and apply more of it, and again draw over the linen cover, holding it tightly to form the convex face proper to do the work. After replenishing, the rubber will probably need a little more oil to help it to work smoothly. Having thus worked on one coat of polish evenly over all the wood until it has got what may best be described as a full look, set it aside for two or three hours to sink in and become hard, and when completely dry, lightly paper off with glass-paper (very finest), afterwards dusting the surface to remove any trace of powder, and lay on a second coat of polish in the same method. Then allow twenty-four hours to dry. Another light papering may possibly be needed—dust off as before recommended and let the wood have a third coat of polish.
The rubber should have a smooth, rounded, or convex surface when you’re working on the wood. Keep linseed oil in one container and some French polish in another. Apply one drop of polish and one drop of oil, then polish in a circular motion—covering the whole surface to be polished. From time to time, as needed (when the rubber becomes sticky and rough, which means it needs more polish), open it up and apply more polish, then go over it again with the linen cover, holding it tightly to maintain the proper convex shape for the task. After replenishing, the rubber might need a bit more oil to work smoothly. Once you’ve applied a coat of polish evenly over all the wood until it looks full, set it aside for two or three hours to dry and harden. Once completely dry, lightly sand it with fine glass paper, dusting the surface to remove any powder, and apply a second coat of polish using the same method. Then let it dry for twenty-four hours. You might need another light sanding—dust off as previously recommended and apply a third coat of polish.
For this third coat a fresh rubber should be made, the inside being sparingly supplied with spirits of wine instead of polish. Put a double fold of linen over it, touch it with one drop of oil, and go very lightly and speedily over the whole work.
For this third coat, you should use a new batch of rubber, adding just a small amount of spirits of wine inside instead of polish. Place a double layer of linen over it, apply one drop of oil, and go over the entire surface lightly and quickly.
In spiriting-off—the object of which is to remove any trace of smudge that may blur the surface unless removed thus by spirit—you should go gently to work, using a very light hand, or you may take the polish off as well, amateurs more especially.
In spirit removal—the goal of which is to eliminate any smudge that might blur the surface unless removed this way with spirit—you should proceed carefully, using a very light touch, or you might accidentally take off the polish too, especially if you're an amateur.
Position.—All work should be placed in an 25easy and accessible position while it is being polished, so that the eye may readily perceive the effect of the rubber; this will greatly help to relieve the difficulties attending the polishing of a fine piece of furniture. It should also be kept quite firm, so that it cannot possibly move about. The most suitable benches for polishers are the ordinary cabinet-makers' benches, with the tops covered with thick, soft cloths; these cloths should not be fastened down, it being an advantage to be able to remove them when required. When a piece of work too large to be placed upon the bench is in hand, pads will be found useful to rest it upon. These can be made by covering pieces of wood about two feet in length by three inches in width with cloth several times doubled, the work being placed so that a good light falls upon it. All thin panelling should be tacked down upon a board by the edges while polishing.
Position.—All work should be positioned in an 25easy and accessible spot while it’s being polished, so that the eye can easily see the effect of the rubber; this will really help to reduce the challenges involved in polishing a fine piece of furniture. It should also be kept steady, so it doesn’t move around. The best benches for polishers are standard cabinet-makers' benches, with the tops covered in thick, soft cloths; these cloths shouldn’t be fastened down, as it’s useful to be able to remove them when needed. For larger pieces that can't fit on the bench, pads can be useful to support them. These can be made by wrapping pieces of wood about two feet long and three inches wide in several layers of cloth, positioning the work so that good light shines on it. All thin panels should be secured to a board by the edges while polishing.
Filling-in.—The first process the wood usually undergoes is "filling-in." This consists in rubbing into the pores of the wood Russian tallow and plaster of Paris, which have been previously heated and mixed together so as to form a thick paste. For rosewood, or to darken mahogany, a little rose-pink should be added. After well rubbing in, the surface should be cleared from all the surplus paste with the end of the scraper, and then rubbed off with shavings 26or old rags, and made quite clean. For birch or oak, some use whiting or soft putty moistened with linseed-oil for the filling; this preparation prevents in a great measure the rising of the grain. For white delicate woods, such as sycamore, maple, or satin-wood, plaster of Paris, mixed with methylated spirit, is used. When polishing pine, a coat of Young's patent size (2d. per lb.) is used instead of the above mixtures, and when dry is rubbed down with fine glass-paper.
Filling-in.—The first process that wood usually goes through is "filling-in." This involves rubbing a mixture of heated Russian tallow and plaster of Paris into the wood's pores to create a thick paste. To enhance rosewood or darken mahogany, a bit of rose-pink should be added. After thoroughly rubbing it in, excess paste should be scraped off with the scraper's edge, and the surface should then be cleaned with shavings 26or old rags to ensure it's completely clean. For birch or oak, some prefer to use whiting or soft putty mixed with linseed oil for filling, as this preparation significantly reduces grain rise. For lighter, more delicate woods like sycamore, maple, or satinwood, a mixture of plaster of Paris and methylated spirit is applied. When finishing pine, a coat of Young's patent size (2d. per lb.) is used instead of the previously mentioned mixtures, and once dry, it is sanded down with fine glass paper.
Some workmen, who regard their modes of filling-in as important secrets, do their work surprisingly quick by the methods here given. The various processes are soon acquired by a little practice, and contribute greatly to the speedy advancement of a smooth and imporous ground, which is the most important point to observe in polishing.
Some workers, who see their techniques as valuable secrets, complete their tasks surprisingly quickly using the methods outlined here. The different processes can be mastered with a bit of practice and greatly aid in achieving a smooth, non-porous surface, which is the key aspect to focus on when polishing.
Applying the Polish.—In commencing to use the polish some are provided with a small earthenware dish, into which the polish is poured for wetting the rubbers; while others make a slit in the cork of the polish bottle, and so let it drip on to the rubber; whichever method is adopted, the rubber should not be saturated, but receive just enough to make a smear. Every time after wetting the rubber and putting on the cover it should be pressed upon the palm of the hand, or if a small rubber it can be tested between 27the thumb and finger. This is an important operation, for by it the polisher can easily tell the exact state of moisture, and at the same time, by the pressure being applied, the moisture is equalised. The tip of the finger should then be just dipped into the linseed-oil, and applied to the face of it; if the rubber should be rather sappy, the greatest care must be used or a coarse streaky roughness will be produced; extreme lightness of hand is required until the rubber is nearly dry. (It would be a serious error to bear heavily on the rubber while the surface is moist; to do so, and to use too much oil on the rubber, are the causes of many failures in polishing.)
Applying the Polish.—When starting to use the polish, some people use a small dish made of earthenware to pour in the polish for wetting the rubbers, while others simply create a slit in the cork of the polish bottle to let it drip onto the rubber. No matter which method is used, the rubber shouldn't be soaked, but just get enough polish to create a light smear. After wetting the rubber and putting on the cover, it should be pressed against the palm of the hand, or if it's a small rubber, it can be tested between the thumb and finger. This step is crucial, as it allows the polisher to easily determine the exact moisture level, and the pressure helps to even out the moisture. The tip of the finger should then be lightly dipped into linseed oil and applied to the surface; if the rubber is a bit too sticky, care must be taken to avoid creating a rough, streaky texture. A very gentle touch is necessary until the rubber is almost dry. (Applying too much pressure on the rubber while it’s wet and using too much oil are both common mistakes that can lead to many polishing failures.)
In commencing to work, pass the rubber a few times gently and lightly over the surface in the direction of the grain; then rub across the grain in a series of circular movements, all one way, in full and free sweeping strokes, until the rubber is dry. Continue this operation until the pores are filled in, and the surface assumes a satisfactory appearance. It should then be left for about twelve hours; the polish will be well into the wood by that time. The polish should then be carefully rubbed down with No. glass-paper; this will remove the atomic roughness usually caused by the rising of the grain during the sinking period. In flat-surface work a paper cork can be used, and the rubbing lightly and regularly done in a careful manner, so as to avoid rubbing through the outer skin, especially at the 28edges and corners, or the work will be irremediably defaced.
When you start working, gently and lightly pass the rubber over the surface in the direction of the grain a few times. Then, rub across the grain in a series of circular motions, all going the same way, using full and sweeping strokes until the rubber is dry. Keep doing this until the pores are filled and the surface looks good. Let it sit for about twelve hours; by then, the polish will have penetrated the wood well. After that, carefully rub down the polish with No. glass-paper; this will smooth out the roughness usually caused by the grain rising during the drying period. For flat surfaces, you can use a paper cork, rubbing lightly and regularly so you don’t rub through the outer layer, especially at the 28edges and corners, or you’ll end up permanently damaging the work.
The woods which possess a rising grain are well known to polishers; these are the light-coloured woods with a coarse grain, viz., ash, birch, and oak. This rising of the grain can in a great measure be prevented by passing a damp sponge over the work before commencing the polishing, allowing it to dry, and papering it. After the rubbing or smoothing-down process is finished, the work should be well dusted; the polishing can then recommence. The above operation must be again repeated with a rotary motion and gradually increased pressure as the rubber gets dry, and finished by lighter rubbings the way of the grain; this will remove any slight marks that may be occasioned by the circular movements of the rubber.
The woods that have a raised grain are well known to polishers; these are the light-colored woods with a coarse grain, namely, ash, birch, and oak. This grain raising can largely be avoided by wiping the surface with a damp sponge before starting to polish, letting it dry, and then sanding it. After the rubbing or smoothing process is complete, the surface should be thoroughly dusted; then polishing can start again. This process needs to be repeated using a rotary motion and gradually increasing pressure as the pad dries, finishing with lighter rubs following the grain; this will eliminate any minor marks that might be left by the circular motions of the pad.
Working too long on any one part is to be avoided, nor should the rubber be allowed to stick even for an instant, or it will pull the coating of polish off to the bare wood. The rubber should be covered with a clean part of the rag as soon as a shiny appearance becomes apparent upon it, or at each time of damping, and less oil should be used towards the end of the operation, so as to gradually clear it all off from the surface. Rubber marks can be removed by rubbing in a direction the reverse of the marks with a half-dry rubber and increased pressure. When the work has received a sufficient body, in finishing the drying of 29the last rubber, ply it briskly the way of the grain to produce a clean dry surface for the spiriting-off.
Working too long on any one area should be avoided, and the rubber shouldn't be allowed to stick for even a moment, or it will pull the polish coating off to the bare wood. The rubber should be covered with a clean part of the rag as soon as it starts to look shiny, or each time you dampen it, and you should use less oil towards the end of the process to gradually remove it from the surface. Rubber marks can be fixed by rubbing in the opposite direction of the marks with a slightly damp rubber and more pressure. Once you've built up enough finish, use the last rubber briskly along the grain to create a clean, dry surface for the final touch.
The following is the method usually employed on fine carved or turned work when finished in the best style. In the first place it is embodied with polish, using a small rubber for the operation, after which it should have one coat of shellac (two parts by weight of shellac to one of spirits) applied with a brush, and when dry it should be carefully smoothed down with flour paper, the utmost caution being observed in dealing with the sharp edges, or the carving will be spoiled. Then it is embodied with polish again, and one coat of glaze applied with the greatest care. A few hours should be allowed to harden, and then finished off with a rubber slightly damped with thin polish. This is an expensive method, but it will pay in appearance for all the time bestowed.
The following is the method typically used on finely carved or turned work when finished in the best way. First, it gets polished with a small rubber for the job, then it should have one coat of shellac (two parts by weight of shellac to one part of spirits) applied with a brush. Once dry, it should be carefully smoothed with fine sandpaper, taking great care with the sharp edges, or the carving could be ruined. After that, it’s polished again, and one coat of glaze is applied very carefully. Allow a few hours for it to harden, and then finish it off with a slightly damp rubber using thin polish. This method is costly, but the appearance is worth all the time spent.
For the best class of cabinet and pianoforte work in amboyna or burr-walnut it is advisable not to use linseed-oil on the sole of the rubber when polishing, but the best hog's lard; the reason for this is that these veneers being so extremely thin and porous the oil will quickly penetrate through to the groundwork, softening the glue, and causing the veneers to rise in a number of small blisters. Of course, this is not always the case, but the use of lard instead of oil will be found a good preventative. Lard is also used on the above class of work when it is desirable to preserve the colour of the wood in its natural state. 30
For the best quality cabinet and piano work in amboyna or burr-walnut, it's recommended to use hog's lard instead of linseed oil on the sole of the rubber when polishing. The reason is that these veneers are very thin and porous, so the oil can quickly soak through to the base, softening the glue and causing the veneers to form small blisters. This doesn't always happen, but using lard instead of oil is a good precaution. Lard is also used for this type of work when you want to keep the wood's natural color. 30
The following method is employed for the best work: Immediately on receiving the job from the cabinet-maker, a good coating of thin, clean glue should be applied with a sponge or brush; this is allowed to dry, and thoroughly harden; it is then cleaned off, using the scraper and glass-paper, cutting it down to the wood. The bodying-in with white polish is the next process, the usual sinking period being allowed; it is again cleaned off, but the scraper this time should not quite reach the wood. Then embody again, and treat in a like manner. In getting up the permanent body, commence with a slight embodying; let this stand, and when the sinking period is over rub it down with a felt rubber and powdered pumice-stone; continue this several times, till the surface presents a satisfactory appearance, and the job is ready for the spiriting process. By this means the wood will retain its natural colour, and a beautiful transparent polish will result, and remain for a number of years. This also is an expensive process, but the result cannot be obtained in any other way.
The following method is used for the best results: As soon as the job is received from the cabinet-maker, apply a good layer of thin, clean glue with a sponge or brush; let it dry and harden completely; then clean it off using a scraper and sandpaper, bringing it down to the wood. The next step is to apply white polish while allowing for the usual settling time; clean it off again, but this time, don’t scrape all the way down to the wood. Then apply more layers in the same way. When building up the permanent finish, start with a light layer; let it sit, and after the settling time, rub it down with a felt pad and powdered pumice stone; repeat this several times until the surface looks satisfactory and is ready for the final polishing process. This method helps the wood keep its natural color and results in a beautiful, transparent finish that lasts for years. Although it's an expensive process, the outcome can’t be achieved any other way.
Spiriting-off.—Most polishers affirm that if an interval of at least a couple of hours elapse between the final embodying and the spiriting-off the brilliancy of the polish will be improved, and remain harder and more durable. The spirit is applied in exactly the same way as the polish, and the same rubber can be used, but it should be 31covered with more than one fold of the soft linen rag; care should be taken not to make it very wet, or the gum on the surface of the work will be redissolved, and a dulness instead of a brilliancy will result. If the spirit should be very strong, the rubber should be breathed upon before using, and a little more oil taken up; some, however, prefer to mix a little polish with the spirit, while others prefer the spirit to be weakened by exposure to the air for a few hours; experience alone must be the teacher in this particular; but if the spirit should not "bite," as it is termed, all will be well. The last rubber should be worked a little longer than usual, and a trifle quicker, so as to remove the slight greasy moisture on the surface.
Finishing Touches.—Most polishers agree that if you wait at least a couple of hours after the final coat before applying the finishing touch, the shine will be better and more durable. The spirit is used in the same way as the polish, and you can use the same rubber, but it should be wrapped in more than one layer of a soft linen cloth. Be careful not to get it too wet, or you’ll dissolve the gum on the surface, which will make it dull instead of shiny. If the spirit is very strong, lightly breathe on the rubber before using it and pick up a bit more oil; some people prefer mixing a bit of polish with the spirit, while others like to let the spirit sit in the air for a few hours to weaken it. Experience is the best teacher for this, but as long as the spirit doesn’t “bite,” everything will turn out fine. The final rubber should be used a bit longer and a little faster than usual to remove the slight oily moisture on the surface.
The finishing touch is given to the work by a soft rag loosely rolled up and just a few drops of spirit dropped upon it, applied quickly the way of the grain. This will remove every defect, and leave it clear and brilliant. If, in a short time after finishing, the polish becomes dull or rough, it will be owing to too much oil being absorbed in the process and working through the surface, combined with dust. It should be cleaned off first with a soft cloth, damped with a little warm water, and the whole repaired, as at first, with equal parts of polish and spirits mixed together, using the least possible damp of oil to make it finish clear; there is no danger of its happening again. In all cases the work must be rubbed till 32quite dry, and when nearly so the pressure may be increased.
The final touch is applied with a soft rag that’s loosely rolled up, along with just a few drops of spirit added to it, and it's quickly applied along the grain. This will eliminate any flaws and leave it looking clear and shiny. If, shortly after finishing, the polish appears dull or rough, it’s likely due to too much oil being absorbed during the process, which then rises to the surface along with dust. Start by cleaning it with a soft cloth dampened with a little warm water, and then repair the whole thing as before, using equal parts of polish and spirits mixed together, applying just enough oil to keep it clear; there’s no risk of this happening again. In all cases, the work must be rubbed until 32completely dry, and when it's nearly dry, you can increase the pressure.
The rubber for spiriting-off should be made up from a piece of old flannel, and be covered with a piece of old rag. This is preferable to very thin rag, and will give a better finish.
The rubber for spiriting-off should be made from a piece of old flannel and covered with a piece of old rag. This is better than very thin rag and will provide a nicer finish.
Prepared Spirits.—This preparation is useful for finishing, as it adds to the lustre and durability, as well as removes every defect of other polishes, and it gives the surface a most brilliant appearance.
Prepared Spirits.—This preparation is great for finishing, as it enhances shine and durability, fixes any flaws in other polishes, and gives the surface a very shiny look.
It is made of half a pint of the very best rectified spirits of wine, two drachms of shellac, and two drachms of gum benzoin. Put these ingredients in a bottle and keep in a warm place till the gum is all dissolved, shaking it frequently; when cold add two teaspoonfuls of the best clear white poppy oil; shake them well together, and it is fit for use.
It consists of half a pint of premium rectified wine spirits, two grams of shellac, and two grams of gum benzoin. Combine these ingredients in a bottle and store it in a warm place until the gum completely dissolves, shaking it often; once it's cool, add two teaspoons of the best clear white poppy oil; shake everything well together, and it's ready to use.
Antique Style.—For mediæval or old English furniture a dull polish is generally preferred to a French polish, because it has a gloss rather than a brilliant polish, which materially assists in showing up mouldings or carvings to the best advantage; it is also more in character with the work of the Middle Ages. Another advantage is the facility of obtaining a new polish (after being once done) should the first one get tarnished, as 33the finishing process can be performed without difficulty by any one, and a new polish obtained each time.
Antique Style.—For medieval or old English furniture, a matte finish is usually preferred over a high-gloss French polish because it provides a subtle shine that highlights the details of mouldings or carvings effectively; it also aligns better with the style of the Middle Ages. Another benefit is how easy it is to reapply a new finish (once the initial one is done) if the first one gets dull, as 33the finishing process can be easily done by anyone, allowing for a refreshed look each time.
On receiving a job which is required to be done in this style, it should be "filled-in" in the usual manner, and afterwards bodied with white polish to a good extent; it is then left for a sinking period (say twelve hours). The work is then carefully rubbed down with powdered pumice-stone and a felt-covered block or rubber, and after well dusting it is ready for finishing. The preparation used for this process is mainly composed of bees'-wax and turpentine (see Wax Polish, page 87), well rubbed in with a piece of felt or a woollen rag, and finished off by rubbing briskly with a very soft cloth or an old handkerchief to produce a gloss.
Upon receiving a job that needs to be done in this way, it should be "filled in" as usual, and then coated with white polish to a good extent; afterward, it should be set aside for a drying period (about twelve hours). The work is then carefully smoothed down with powdered pumice stone and a felt-covered block or rubber, and after thoroughly dusting, it's ready for finishing. The preparation used for this process mainly consists of beeswax and turpentine (see Wax Polish, page 87), applied with a piece of felt or a wool rag, and finished by rubbing quickly with a very soft cloth or an old handkerchief to achieve a shine.
Dull or Egg-shell Polish.—This is another style of finishing for mediæval work; the process is very simple. In commencing a job to be finished in this style, the process of "filling-in" and "embodying" are first gone through, then a sinking period is allowed, after which it is embodied again, till the work is ready for finishing. All the parts should be carefully examined to see if there is a good coating of polish upon them. This is important, for if the work should be only thinly coated it is liable to be spoiled by rubbing through in the last process. After allowing a few hours for the surface to 34harden, a pounce bag of powdered pumice-stone should be applied to the work, and a felt-covered rubber used, rubbing down in the direction of the grain until the work is of the desired dulness.
Dull or Egg-shell Polish.—This is another finishing style for medieval work; the process is very straightforward. When starting a job with this finish, the steps of "filling-in" and "embodying" are done first, followed by a settling period, after which it is embodied again until the work is ready for finishing. All parts should be closely inspected to ensure they have a good layer of polish. This is crucial because if the work has only a thin coating, it could be ruined by rubbing through during the final process. After letting the surface harden for a few hours, apply a pounce bag filled with powdered pumice stone to the work, using a felt-covered rubber to rub in the direction of the grain until the desired level of dullness is achieved.
For the cheaper kind of work done in this style, the first process, of course, is the filling-in; then a rubber of wadding is taken and used without a cover, made rather sappy with polish and a few drops of oil added; and after bodying-in with this sufficiently, the work should be stood aside for twelve hours, then rubbed down with some fine worn glass-paper. The embodying is then again commenced, a proper rubber and cover being used; and when sufficient is put on, and while the surface is still soft, the pounce above mentioned should be applied, and rubbed down with a piece of wadding slightly moistened with linseed-oil until the desired dulness appears. This is becoming the fashionable finish for black walnut work.
For the more affordable type of work done in this style, the first step, of course, is filling in; then a rubber with padding is used without a cover, slightly dampened with polish and a few drops of oil added. After applying enough of this, the work should be left to sit for twelve hours, then sanded down with some fine worn sandpaper. The embodiment then starts again, using a proper rubber and cover; when enough is applied and the surface is still soft, the mentioned pounce should be applied and rubbed down with a piece of padding slightly moistened with linseed oil until the desired matte finish is achieved. This has become the trendy finish for black walnut work.
Polishing in the Lathe.—The lathe is of more use to a polisher than a great many persons outside the trade would imagine. By its aid turned work can be finished in a most superior style, and in less time than by hand. The articles usually done by the lathe are wood musical instruments, such as clarionets, flutes, etc.; also cornice-poles, ends, and mahogany rings, the latter being first placed in a hollow 35chuck and the insides done, after which they are finished upon the outside on a conical chuck. For table-legs, chair-legs, and all the turnery used in the cabinet-work, it will be found of great advantage to finish the turned parts before the work is put together.
Polishing in the Lathe.—The lathe is more useful to a polisher than many people outside the trade realize. With its help, turned work can be finished in a superior way and in less time than by hand. The items typically processed by the lathe include wooden musical instruments like clarinets and flutes, as well as cornice poles, ends, and mahogany rings. The rings are first put in a hollow 35chuck for interior finishing, after which they are polished on the outside using a conical chuck. For table legs, chair legs, and all the turning used in cabinet work, it's very beneficial to finish the turned parts before assembling the work.
Most of the best houses in the trade finish their work in this way, where all the work is polished out entirely with the rubber. In the first place, the filling-in is done. The band is thrown off the pulley and the work rubbed in; at the same time the pulley is turned round by the left hand. When this is done, the band is replaced and the work cleaned off with rags or shavings, the lathe to be driven with speed to get a clean surface. When applying the polish the lathe should revolve with a very slow motion.
Most of the top companies in the industry complete their work this way, where everything is polished out completely with rubber. First, the filling is done. The belt is taken off the pulley, and the work is rubbed in while the pulley is turned with the left hand. Once that's done, the belt is put back on, and the work is cleaned off with rags or shavings, with the lathe running quickly to achieve a smooth surface. When applying the polish, the lathe should turn very slowly.
The rubbers best adapted for turned work are made of white wadding, as the hollows and other intricacies can be completely finished out with a soft rubber. The work should first receive a coating of thick shellac, two parts by weight of shellac to one of methylated spirits, and applied with a brush or a soft sponge; after a couple of hours this is nicely smoothed with fine paper, and the "bodying-in" completed with the soft rubber and thin polish. There are numerous hard woods which do not require filling-in, amongst which may be mentioned boxwood, cocus, ebony, etc.; these may be rapidly polished in the lathe, on account of their texture, with the white polish. 36In spiriting-off a very soft piece of chamois leather (if it is hard and creased it will scratch) should be damped with methylated spirits, then wrung so that the spirit may be equally diffused; the lathe should then be driven at a rapid speed, and the leather held softly to the work. In a few minutes, if a dark wood, a brilliant surface will be produced.
The best rubbers for turned work are made of white wadding, as the grooves and other details can be completely finished off with a soft rubber. First, the work should get a coat of thick shellac, mixing two parts by weight of shellac with one part of methylated spirits, and applying it with a brush or a soft sponge; after a couple of hours, this is smoothed out with fine paper, and the "bodying-in" is finished with the soft rubber and thin polish. There are many hardwoods that don’t need filling, including boxwood, cocus, ebony, etc.; these can be polished quickly in the lathe due to their texture, using white polish. 36When spiriting off, a very soft piece of chamois leather (if it’s hard and creased, it will scratch) should be dampened with methylated spirits and then wrung out so the spirits are evenly distributed; the lathe should be run at high speed, and the leather should be held gently against the work. In a few minutes, if it’s a dark wood, a brilliant surface will be achieved.
CHAPTER IV.
CHEAP WORK.
Glazing.—Glaze is known to the trade under several names, such as slake, finish, and telegraph; it is used only for cheap work, when economy of time is a consideration, and is made as follows: mastic, 1 oz.; benzoin, 5 ozs.; methylated spirit, 5 gills. A superior article can be obtained from G. Purdom, 49, Commercial Road, Whitechapel, E., who is the manufacturer of a "patent glaze."
Glazing.—Glaze is referred to in the industry by several names, including slake, finish, and telegraph; it is only used for low-cost projects when saving time is a priority, and it’s made like this: 1 oz. of mastic, 5 oz. of benzoin, and 5 gills of methylated spirit. A higher-quality product can be purchased from G. Purdom, 49 Commercial Road, Whitechapel, E., who produces a "patent glaze."
First give the work a rubber or two of polish after the "filling-in"; it is important to dry the last rubber thoroughly, so that no unctuousness remains upon the surface before applying the glaze, otherwise it will be of no effect. The way to apply it is as follows: Prepare a rubber as for polishing and make it moderately wet, and take only one steady wipe the way of the grain, never going over the same surface twice while wet; and when dry, if one coat is found not to be enough, apply a second in the same manner. For mouldings or the backs and sides of chair-work, this is generally considered to be sufficient. Some 38polishers will persist in using glaze to a large extent, even on the best-paid work; but it is not recommended, as the surface will not retain its brilliancy for a lengthened period, particularly in hot weather. Nothing is so good for the best class of work as polishing entirely with French polish.
First, give the work a good polish or two after the "filling-in"; it’s important to let the last polish dry completely so that there’s no grease left on the surface before applying the glaze, or it won’t work properly. Here’s how to apply it: Prepare a polish just like you would for polishing and make it moderately damp, then take one smooth swipe in the direction of the grain, never going over the same area twice while it's wet; and when it’s dry, if one coat isn’t enough, apply a second coat in the same way. For moldings or the backs and sides of chairs, this is usually considered sufficient. Some 38polishers will insist on using glaze extensively, even on high-end work; but that's not recommended, as the surface won’t keep its shine for a long time, especially in hot weather. Nothing works better for high-quality work than polishing entirely with French polish.
The way of treating small flat surfaces such as the frames of tables, looking-glasses, builders' work, etc., is to first fill in, and give one or two rubbers of polish, drying the last rubber thoroughly; then glaze, and after a period of two or three hours finish with a rubber slightly wetted with thin polish. It is a bad plan to put glaze on newly-spirited work, or to re-apply it on old bodies.
The method for finishing small flat surfaces like table frames, mirrors, and construction work is to first fill them in and apply one or two coats of polish, making sure the last coat is fully dry. After that, apply glaze, and after waiting two or three hours, finish with a cloth slightly dampened with thin polish. It’s not a good idea to apply glaze to newly polished work or to reapply it on old surfaces.
The following is another method for cheap work: A coating of clear size is first given in a warm state (this can be obtained at most oil-shops), and when dry is rubbed down with fine glass-paper, after which a coating of varnish is applied with a sponge or a broad camel-hair brush, giving long sweeping strokes. The tool should be plied with some degree of speed, as spirit varnishes have not the slow setting properties which distinguish those of oil, and care should be taken not to go over the same part twice. When this is thoroughly hard it is nicely smoothed with fine paper, a few rubberfuls of polish is given, and it is then ready for spiriting-off.
The following is another method for inexpensive work: First, apply a coat of clear size while it’s warm (you can find this at most paint stores). Once it dries, sand it down with fine sandpaper. Next, use a sponge or a wide camel-hair brush to apply a coat of varnish with long, smooth strokes. Move the tool at a decent speed, as spirit varnishes dry faster than oil-based ones, and be careful not to go over the same area twice. Once it’s fully dried, smooth it out with fine paper, apply a few coats of polish, and then it’s ready for the final finish.
Another plan is frequently adopted for cheap 39work: Make a thin paste with plaster of Paris, suitably tinted and watered, and well rub in across the grain with a piece of felt or old coarse canvas till the pores are all full; any superfluity should be instantly wiped off from the surface before it has time to set. The succeeding processes are papering and oiling. In applying the polish, which should be done immediately after oiling, the rubber should be made rather sappy with thin polish, and worked without oil. During the embodying a pounce-bag containing plaster of Paris is sparingly used; this application tends to fill the pores and also to harden the body of polish on the exterior, but too much should not be used, or it will impart a semi-opaque appearance to the work. This first body is allowed sufficient time to harden; it is then rubbed down lightly with flour paper or old worn No. 1, and then embodied with thicker polish or a mixture of polish and varnish, and the smallest quantity of oil applied to the rubber. When a sufficient body of polish is given to the work, the surface is rubbed very carefully with a lump of moist putty plied in the longitudinal direction of the grain; this will bring up a gloss, and very little spiriting will be required.
Another approach is often used for inexpensive 39work: Create a thin paste using plaster of Paris, appropriately colored and watered down, and then rub it in well against the grain with a piece of felt or old rough canvas until all the pores are filled; any excess should be wiped off immediately before it has a chance to set. The next steps are papering and oiling. When applying the polish, which should be done right after oiling, the rubber should be slightly damp with thin polish and worked without oil. During the process, a pounce-bag filled with plaster of Paris is used sparingly; this helps fill the pores and harden the outer layer of polish, but too much can make the work look semi-opaque. This initial layer is allowed enough time to harden; then it is lightly rubbed down with flour paper or an old worn No. 1, followed by applying a thicker polish or a mix of polish and varnish, using the smallest amount of oil on the rubber. Once a sufficient layer of polish is applied, the surface is carefully rubbed with a piece of damp putty in line with the grain; this will create a shine, and only a little spirits will be needed.
Stencilling.—An imitation of marqueterie on light-coloured woods can be obtained by the following method: Cut a stencil pattern in stout cartridge paper (this is best done upon a piece of 40glass with the point of a sharp penknife), and place it on the centre of a panel or wherever required, and have ready some gas-black mixed with thin polish; apply this with a camel-hair pencil over the cut-out pattern, and when it is removed finish the lines and touch up with a finer tool. The work should be first bodied-in, and when the pattern is dry rubbed down with a piece of hair-cloth (the smooth side down) on a cork rubber to a smooth surface, after which the polishing can be proceeded with until finished. Upon oak this will have the appearance of inlaid work.
Stenciling.—You can create a look similar to marquetry on light-colored woods using this method: Cut a stencil pattern from sturdy cartridge paper (it’s best to do this on a piece of 40glass with a sharp knife), and position it in the center of a panel or wherever needed. Prepare some gas-black mixed with thin polish; use a camel-hair brush to apply this over the cut-out pattern. Once you remove the stencil, finish the lines and touch up with a finer tool. Start by filling in the background, and when the pattern is dry, smooth it down with a piece of hair-cloth (the smooth side down) on a cork rubber until it’s even. After that, you can proceed with polishing until it’s complete. On oak, this will resemble inlaid work.
Charcoal Polishing.—A method known as "charcoal polishing" is now much used for producing the beautiful dead-black colour which seems to have the density of ebony. Its invention is due to French cabinet-makers. The woods used by them are particularly well adapted for staining black or any other colour, limetree, beech, cherry, pear, soft mahogany, or any wood of a close and compact grain being the woods usually selected.
Charcoal Polishing.—A technique called "charcoal polishing" is now widely used to achieve that stunning dead-black color that appears to have the richness of ebony. This method was invented by French cabinet-makers. The woods they use are especially suited for staining black or any other color, with lime tree, beech, cherry, pear, soft mahogany, or any wood with a tight and smooth grain being the typical choices.
The first process is to give the work a coating of camphor dissolved in water and made rather strong; this will soon soak into the wood, and immediately afterwards another coat composed of sulphate of iron-water with a few nut-galls added. These solutions in blending penetrate the wood and give it an indelible tinge, and also prevent insects from attacking it. After these coats are 41dry, rub the surface with a hard brush (an old scrubbing-brush will do) the way of the grain, after which rub the flat parts with natural stick charcoal, and the carved or indented portions with powdered charcoal; the softest portion of the charcoal only should be used, because if a single hard grain should be applied it would seriously damage the surface. The workman should have ready at the same time a preparation of linseed-oil and essence of turpentine (linseed-oil one gill, and essence of turpentine one teaspoonful), a portion of which should be freely taken up with a piece of soft flannel and well rubbed into the work. These rubbings with the preparation and charcoal several times will give the article of furniture a beautiful dead-black colour and polish. This method of polishing is applied to the black-and-gold furniture, cabinets, etc., in imitation of ebony.
The first step is to apply a coating of camphor dissolved in water, making it quite strong; this will quickly soak into the wood. After that, apply another coat made from iron sulfate water with a few nut galls added. These solutions mix together and penetrate the wood, giving it a lasting color while also preventing insect damage. Once these coats are 41dry, use a hard brush (an old scrubbing brush works) to rub the surface in the direction of the grain. Then, rub the flat areas with natural stick charcoal and the carved or indented areas with powdered charcoal; only the softest part of the charcoal should be used, as even one hard grain could seriously damage the surface. At the same time, the worker should have a mixture of linseed oil and turpentine ready (one gill of linseed oil and one teaspoonful of turpentine), and some of this should be applied generously with a piece of soft flannel, rubbing it well into the work. Repeating these rubbings with the mixture and charcoal several times will give the furniture a beautiful dead-black color and shine. This polishing method is used on black-and-gold furniture, cabinets, etc., to imitate ebony.
Another good black polish is obtained by gas-black being applied to the rubber after wetting with French polish, the cover being then put on and worked in the usual manner.
Another good black polish is achieved by applying gas-black to the rubber after it's been moistened with French polish, then putting on the cover and working it in the usual way.
These black polishes should not be applied if there are coloured woods in the piece of furniture. Should the work be already dyed black, or in black veneers, it is best to use white polish, which will greatly help to preserve the transparent density of the dye.
These black polishes shouldn't be used if there are colored woods in the furniture. If the piece is already dyed black or has black veneers, it’s better to use white polish, which will really help maintain the clear richness of the dye.
CHAPTER V.
RE-POLISHING OLD WORK.
If the piece of furniture requiring to be re-polished should be in bad condition, it is best to clean off thoroughly, using the liquid ammonia (see page 94), or by the scraper and glass-paper. The indentations may be erased by dipping into hot water a piece of thick brown paper three or four times doubled and applying it to the part; the point of a red-hot poker should be immediately placed upon the wet paper, which will cause the water to boil into the wood and swell up the bruise; the thickness of the paper prevents the wood from being scorched by the hot poker. After the moisture is evaporated, the paper should be again wetted if required. If only shallow dents, scratches, and broken parts of the polish present themselves, carefully coat them two or three times with a thick solution of shellac, and when the last coating becomes hard carefully paper down with a piece of old glass-paper and a cork rubber.
If the piece of furniture that needs re-polishing is in bad shape, it's best to clean it thoroughly using liquid ammonia (see page 94) or with a scraper and sandpaper. To remove dents, dip a thick piece of brown paper into hot water three or four times, fold it, and apply it to the affected area; then, immediately place the end of a hot poker on the wet paper, which will make the water boil into the wood and raise the dent. The thickness of the paper protects the wood from being burned by the hot poker. Once the moisture has evaporated, re-wet the paper if necessary. If there are only shallow dents, scratches, or broken areas of polish, carefully coat them two or three times with a thick solution of shellac, and when the last coat hardens, lightly sand it down with a piece of old sandpaper and a cork rubber.
If the surface should be in good condition, it 43is necessary only to remove the viscid rust; this is done by friction with a felt-covered rubber and pure spirits of turpentine; by this means the polish remains unsullied. If the surface should not be in very good condition, a flannel should be used smeared with a paste of bathbrick-dust and water, or a paste made of the finest emery flour and spirits of turpentine. After cleansing, and before the polish is applied, it is a good plan to just moisten the surface with raw linseed-oil; this will cause the old body to unite with the new one.
If the surface is in good condition, it 43only needs the sticky rust removed; you can do this by rubbing it with a felt-covered rubber and pure turpentine; this way, the polish stays clean. If the surface isn’t in very good shape, use a flannel soaked in a paste made of bath brick dust and water, or a paste made of the finest emery flour mixed with turpentine. After cleaning and before applying the polish, it's a good idea to slightly dampen the surface with raw linseed oil; this will help the old finish blend with the new one.
In order to carry out the process of re-polishing with facility, it is necessary to disunite all the various parts, such as panels, carvings, etc., before commencing the operation. The polish is applied in the usual manner, and when a good body is laid on the work should be set aside for twelve hours, after which it can be finished. It should be particularly observed that in polishing no job should be finished immediately after the rubbing-down process; a sinking period should always be allowed. If the work should be immediately finished, the consequences are that in a few hours all the marks and scratches of the paper, etc., will be discernible, and the polished surface will present a very imperfect appearance, although looking perfect when first finished.
To successfully re-polish, you need to take apart all the different parts, like panels and carvings, before starting the process. The polish is applied as usual, and once a good coat is on, the work should be set aside for twelve hours before it can be completed. It's important to note that you shouldn’t finish the job right after the sanding process; always allow for a resting period. If you try to finish immediately, the marks and scratches from the paper will become visible in a few hours, and the polished surface will look imperfect, even though it may seem flawless right after finishing.
Holes and crevices may be well filled up with a cement made in the following manner: In a large iron spoon place a lump of beeswax about 44the size of a walnut, a pinch of the pigments mentioned on page 5, according to the colour required, a piece of common rosin the size of a nut, and a piece of tallow as large as a pea; melt, and it is ready for use. Some add a little shellac, but much will make it very brittle. A similar substance to the above can be bought at the French warehouses.
Holes and cracks can be effectively filled with a cement made like this: In a large iron spoon, place a chunk of beeswax about the size of a walnut, a pinch of the pigments listed on page 5, depending on the color you need, a piece of common rosin the size of a nut, and a piece of tallow about the size of a pea; melt it, and it’s ready to use. Some people add a bit of shellac, but too much will make it very brittle. A similar product to this can also be purchased at French supply stores.
CHAPTER VI.
SPIRIT VARNISHING.
Most polishers are agreed that to obtain a good surface with varnish it is necessary to give the work, where it is possible to do so, a rubberful of polish first, and to thoroughly dry the rubber; but in most carved work the surface is not accessible, and the brush must be used. Sometimes the carving is extremely coarse, and with an open porous grain, in which case it is best to oil it first and then to fine-paper it down; by this process a thin paste is formed by the attrition, which materially assists in filling up the pores. Before commencing to use the varnish have ready an earthenware dish or box,—one of the tins used for the preserved meats or fish will answer the purpose,—with two holes drilled so that a piece of wire can be fastened diametrically across the top; this is called a "regulator," and when the brush is passed once or twice over this it prevents an unnecessary quantity of varnish being transferred to the work. 46
Most polishers agree that to get a good surface with varnish, it's essential to apply a coat of polish first where possible and let the applicator dry completely. However, in most carved pieces, the surface isn't accessible, necessitating the use of a brush. Sometimes, the carving is very coarse and has an open porous grain, so it’s best to oil it first and then sand it down using fine paper; this process creates a thin paste through friction that helps fill the pores. Before starting to use the varnish, have a ceramic dish or box ready—one of the tin containers used for preserved meats or fish will work fine—with two holes drilled to attach a piece of wire across the top; this is called a "regulator," and passing the brush over it once or twice prevents an excessive amount of varnish from being applied to the work. 46
Varnishes.—The ingredients for making varnish are very similar to those for making polish, but the proportions are somewhat different. Furniture varnish consists of two kinds, viz.: the brown-hard and the white-hard; the former is used for dark woods, such as mahogany, walnut, rosewood, etc.; whilst the latter is used for the light-coloured woods, in conjunction with the white polish. A few years since the brown-hard varnish was made from these ingredients:
Varnishes.—The ingredients for making varnish are quite similar to those for making polish, but the proportions vary a bit. Furniture varnish comes in two types: brown-hard and white-hard. The brown-hard is used for darker woods like mahogany, walnut, and rosewood, while the white-hard is used for lighter woods, along with the white polish. A few years ago, the brown-hard varnish was made from these ingredients:
1 gallon of methylated spirit,
40 ozs. of shellac,
4 ozs. of rosin,
5 ozs. of benzoin,
2 ozs. of sandarach,
2 ozs. of white rosin.
1 gallon of denatured alcohol,
40 ozs. of shellac,
4 ozs. of rosin,
5 ozs. of benzoin,
2 ozs. of sandarac,
2 ozs. of white rosin.
The brown-hard varnish which is used at the present time is made differently, and produces a better result; it is made from the following:
The brown-hard varnish that’s used today is made differently and gives better results; it’s made from the following:
1 gallon of methylated spirit,
32 ozs. of shellac,
8 ozs. of rosin,
8 ozs. of benzoin.
1 gallon of denatured alcohol,
32 oz. of shellac,
8 oz. of rosin,
8 oz. of benzoin.
The white-hard or transparent varnish for white wood is made with
The clear or transparent varnish for white wood is made with
1 gallon of methylated spirit,
32 ozs. of bleached shellac,
24 ozs. of gum sandarach.
1 gallon of denatured alcohol,
32 oz. of bleached shellac,
24 oz. of gum sandarac.
Brushes and Pencils.—The brushes used for varnishing are either flat, in tin, or round, tied firmly to the handle, and made of camel's-hair; but the small white bristle-tools and red-sable pencils will frequently be found of service in coating delicate carving, or turned work. Varnish brushes can be obtained from a quarter of an inch to four inches and upwards in width; the most useful brush, however, for general use is about an inch wide. It is important that brushes should be cleaned in spirits immediately after use, for if laid by in varnish they lose their elasticity and are soon spoiled; but if this preservative principle is ever neglected, the hardened brush should be soaked in methylated spirit, and if wanted for immediate use the spirit will soften the varnish quicker if made luke-warm. The spirit should be gently pressed out by the finger and thumb. All varnish brushes when not in use should be hung up, or kept in such a position that they do not rest upon their hairy ends, either in a box or tin free from dust.
Brushes and Pencils.—The brushes used for varnishing come in flat or round shapes, securely attached to their handles, and are made from camel's hair. However, small white bristle brushes and red sable pencils are often handy for coating delicate carvings or turned work. Varnish brushes can range from a quarter-inch to four inches and wider; the most practical brush for general use is about an inch wide. It's crucial to clean brushes with spirits right after use, because if they are left in varnish, they lose their flexibility and can quickly get ruined. If this care is neglected, the stiff brush should be soaked in methylated spirit, and for immediate use, the spirit will soften the varnish faster if it's warmed to a lukewarm temperature. Gently press the spirit out using your fingers and thumb. All varnish brushes, when not in use, should be hung up or stored in a way that keeps them off their bristly ends, whether in a box or a tin that's free of dust.
Mode of Operation.—It is usual in varnish48ing to give the work three coats, and always allow each coat to dry thoroughly before applying the next. It should be noted that spirit varnishes begin to dry immediately they are laid on; therefore, on no account should they be touched with the brush again whilst wet, or when dry they will present a rough surface. Always ply the brush quickly, and never go over a second time. When giving the first or second coats it is unimportant how they are applied, whether across the grain or with the grain, but the finishing coat should always be with the grain. If the varnish should appear frothy when laid on, it is of no consequence, as it will dry smooth if equally and evenly applied before a good fire or in a warm atmosphere.
Mode of Operation.—In varnishing, it's common to apply three coats, making sure to let each coat dry completely before putting on the next one. It's important to remember that spirit varnishes start to dry as soon as they’re applied, so never touch them with the brush again while they're wet, or they will dry with a rough surface. Always move the brush quickly and don't go over the same spot twice. When applying the first or second coats, it doesn't matter if you go across the grain or with the grain, but the final coat should always be applied with the grain. If the varnish looks frothy when applied, that's okay, as it will dry smooth if applied evenly and at a good heat, like in front of a fire or in a warm room.
Coloured varnishes can be made in exactly the same manner as coloured polishes (see page 6). The beautiful glossy black varnishes so admired on Indian cabinet-work, specimens of which can be seen at the Indian Museum, are very difficult to obtain in England, but a description of them may be interesting.
Coloured varnishes can be made in the same way as coloured polishes (see page 6). The stunning glossy black varnishes that are so appreciated on Indian furniture, examples of which can be found at the Indian Museum, are quite hard to find in England, but a description of them might be interesting.
East Indian Varnishes.—The Sylhet varnish is composed of two parts of the juice of the bhela (the tree which bears the marking nuts of India), and one part of the juice of the jowar. The articles varnished with it at Sylhet are of the most beautiful glossy black; and it seems equally 49fitted for varnishing iron, leather, paper, wood, or stone. It has a sort of whitish-grey colour when first taken out of the bottle, but in a few minutes it becomes perfectly black by exposure to the air. In the temperature of this country it is too thick to be laid on alone; but it may be rendered more fluid by heat. In this case, however, it is clammy, and seems to dry very slowly. When diluted with spirits of turpentine, it dries more quickly; but still with less rapidity than is desirable.
East Indian Varnishes.—The Sylhet varnish is made up of two parts of the juice from the bhela tree (the tree that produces India's marking nuts) and one part of the juice from jowar. The items varnished with it in Sylhet have a stunning glossy black finish; it seems equally suitable for varnishing iron, leather, paper, wood, or stone. It initially has a sort of whitish-grey color when first taken out of the bottle, but within a few minutes, it turns completely black when exposed to the air. In this country’s temperature, it’s too thick to apply on its own; however, it can be made more fluid by heating it. In this case, though, it becomes sticky and appears to dry very slowly. When mixed with spirits of turpentine, it dries faster; but still not as quickly as you'd want.
The tsitsi, or Rangoon varnish, is less known than the Sylhet varnish. It is probably made from the juice of the bhela alone. It appears to have the same general properties as the Sylhet varnish, but dries more rapidly. The varnish from the kheeso, or varnish-tree, may be the same as the Rangoon varnish, but is at present considered to be very different. The kheeso grows particularly in Kubboo, a valley on the banks of the Ningtee, between Munnipore and the Burman empire. It attains to such a large size, that it affords planks upwards of three feet in breadth, and in appearance and grain is very like mahogany. A similar tree is found in great abundance and perfection at Martaban.
The tsitsi, or Rangoon varnish, is less well-known than the Sylhet varnish. It's likely made from the juice of the bhela tree alone. It seems to have the same general properties as the Sylhet varnish but dries faster. The varnish from the kheeso, or varnish tree, might be the same as the Rangoon varnish, but it's currently thought to be very different. The kheeso grows mainly in Kubboo, a valley on the banks of the Ningtee River, between Manipur and the Burmese empire. It can grow so large that it produces planks over three feet wide, and its appearance and grain are very much like mahogany. A similar tree is found abundantly and in great quality in Martaban.
A poisonous vapour exhales from several of the Indian varnishes, especially from that of Sylhet, and is apt to produce over the whole skin inflammations, swellings, itchings, and pustules, as if the body had been stung by a number of wasps. Its 50effects, however, go off in a few hours. As a preventative the persons who collect the varnish, before going to work, smear their faces and hands with greasy matter to prevent the varnish poison coming into contact with their skin.
A toxic vapor releases from several types of Indian varnishes, especially the one from Sylhet, and can cause skin irritations, swelling, itching, and pustules, making it feel like you’ve been stung by a bunch of wasps. Its 50effects, however, wear off in a few hours. To prevent this, the people who gather the varnish cover their faces and hands with grease before starting work to keep the varnish poison from touching their skin.
CHAPTER VII.
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS.
Remarks on Polishing.—Amateurs at French polishing will be more successful on a large surface than a small one.
Comments on Polishing.—Beginners in French polishing will have better results on larger surfaces than on smaller ones.
When polishing, the rubber-cloth should be changed occasionally, or the brightness will not remain when finished.
When polishing, the rubber cloth should be changed from time to time, or the shine won't last once you're done.
A most efficacious improver of many kinds of woods is raw linseed-oil mixed with a little rectified spirits of turpentine.
A very effective way to improve various types of wood is to use raw linseed oil mixed with a bit of purified turpentine.
French polish can be tinted a light-red with alkanet-root, and a dark-red with dragon's blood.
French polish can be dyed light red with alkanet root and dark red with dragon's blood.
A good Turkey sponge is capable of spreading either stain or varnish more smoothly than a camel's-hair brush on a flat surface.
A good turkey sponge can spread either stain or varnish more smoothly than a camel's-hair brush on a flat surface.
The sub-nitrate of bismuth mentioned on p. 12 is beginning to supersede oxalic acid for bleaching processes.
The sub-nitrate of bismuth mentioned on p. 12 is starting to take the place of oxalic acid for bleaching processes.
Thin panels for doors should be securely tacked down to a level board, and polished with a 52large round flannel rubber having a very flat sole. Fret-work panels should have all the edges entirely finished with varnish before they undergo the above operation. To get a good polish upon a full-fret panel is considered by polishers to be the most difficult part in the work, on account of the extreme delicacy and frangibility of the work and the great carefulness required.
Thin panels for doors should be securely attached to a flat board and polished with a 52large round flannel rubber that has a very flat sole. Fret-work panels should have all their edges completely finished with varnish before this process. Achieving a good polish on a full-fret panel is considered by polishers to be the most challenging aspect of the work due to the extreme delicacy and fragility of the piece, along with the careful attention required.
Soft spongy wood may be satiated by rubbing a sponge well filled with polish across the grain until it becomes dry.
Soft, spongy wood can be treated by rubbing a sponge soaked with polish along the grain until it dries.
In polishing a very large surface, such as a Loo-table top or a wardrobe end, it is best to do only half at a time, or if a large top a quarter only.
In polishing a really large surface, like a dining table top or the end of a wardrobe, it's best to do just half at a time, or if it’s a large top, only a quarter.
The approved method of treating dining-table tops is to well body-in with French polish, after which thoroughly glass-paper down with fine paper, and then use the oil polish (see page 87).
The recommended way to treat dining table tops is to apply French polish properly, then sand it down thoroughly with fine paper, and finally use the oil polish (see page 87).
Immediately after using a rubber, it should be kept in an air-tight tin canister, where it will always remain fresh and fit for use.
Immediately after using a condom, it should be kept in an air-tight tin container, where it will always stay fresh and ready for use.
The Polishing Shop.—A few words as to the polishing shop may be acceptable to those who possess ample room and desire the best results.
The Polishing Shop.—A brief note about the polishing shop might be helpful for those who have enough space and want the best results.
A good light in this, as in many other arts, is a very important matter, and by a good light we mean all the light that can be obtained without the glare of the direct rays of the sun. Light from side windows is preferable to that from skylights for three reasons: (1) Skylights are very liable to leakage; (2) they are frequently, for greater or less periods, covered with snow in winter; (3) the rays of the sun transmitted by them in summer are frequently so powerful as to blister shellac or varnish.
A good light in this, as in many other arts, is really important, and by good light, we mean all the light that can be gathered without the harsh glare of direct sunlight. Light from side windows is better than that from skylights for three reasons: (1) Skylights are prone to leaking; (2) they often get covered with snow in winter for extended periods; (3) the sunlight streamed through them in summer can be so intense that it can damage shellac or varnish.
Good ventilation is at all times of importance, and especially so in summer, both as tending to dry the varnish or shellac more evenly and rapidly, and as contributing to the comfort of the workmen. The latter consideration is of importance even as a matter of economy, as men in a room the atmosphere of which is pleasant and wholesome will feel better and accomplish more than they could do in the close and forbidding apartments in which they sometimes work.
Good ventilation is always important, especially in the summer. It helps the varnish or shellac dry more evenly and quickly, and it also makes the work environment more comfortable for the workers. This is important not just for comfort, but also for productivity; workers in a pleasant and healthy atmosphere will feel better and get more done than they would in stuffy and uninviting spaces where they sometimes have to work.
Any suggestion in reference to freedom from dust, as a matter to be considered in locating rooms for this business, would seem to be entirely superfluous, as it is clear that there is hardly any 54department of mechanical work which is so susceptible to injury from dust as the finishing of furniture, including varnishing and polishing.
Any suggestion regarding freedom from dust when deciding where to place rooms for this business seems completely unnecessary, as it’s obvious that there is hardly any 54department of mechanical work that is more vulnerable to damage from dust than furniture finishing, including varnishing and polishing.
Finishing rooms may be arranged in three departments. The first should include the room devoted to sand-papering and filling. These processes, much more than any other part of furniture polishing, produce dirt and dust, and it is plain that the room devoted to them should be so far isolated from the varnishing room as not to introduce into it these injurious elements.
Finishing rooms can be set up in three sections. The first should be designated for sanding and filling. These processes, more than any other part of furniture polishing, create a lot of dirt and dust. It's clear that this room needs to be far enough away from the varnishing room to prevent these harmful elements from spreading in there.
Another room should be appropriated to the bodying-in, smoothing and rubbing-down processes. The third room is for spiriting and varnishing, or the application of the final coats of varnish, which is the most important of all the processes in finishing. It requires a very light and clean room, and a greater degree of heat than a general workroom. It should, as nearly as possible, be uniform, and kept up to summer heat; in no case ought the temperature to fall below fifty nor rise higher than eighty-five degrees Fahrenheit while the varnishing process is going on. Varnishing performed under these circumstances will be more thorough in result, have a brighter appearance and better polish, than if the drying is slow and under irregular temperature. For drying work, the best kind of heat is that from a stove or furnace. 55
Another room should be set aside for the processes of shaping, smoothing, and rubbing down. The third room is designated for applying the final coats of varnish, which is the most crucial step in finishing. It needs to be a very clean and bright room, with a higher level of heat than a typical workspace. The temperature should stay as close to summer heat as possible; it should never drop below fifty degrees or rise above eighty-five degrees Fahrenheit during varnishing. Varnishing done under these conditions will yield better results, with a shinier finish and smoother polish, compared to work done in fluctuating and slower drying conditions. The best heat source for drying is from a stove or furnace. 55
Steam heat is not so good for two reasons: (1), it is too moist and soft, causing the work to sweat rather than to dry hard, and (2), the temperature of a room heated by steam is liable to considerable variation, and especially to becoming lower in the night. This fire heat is as necessary for the varnishing room in damp and cloudy weather in summer as it is in winter. At all seasons, and by night as well as by day, the heat should be as dry as possible, and kept uniformly up to summer heat, by whatever means this result is secured. Varnished work, after receiving the last coat, should be allowed to remain one day in the varnishing room. It may then be removed into the general workroom.
Steam heat isn't ideal for two reasons: (1) it's too moist and soft, which makes the work sweat instead of drying hard, and (2) the temperature in a room heated by steam can fluctuate quite a bit, especially dropping at night. This fire heat is just as essential for the varnishing room in damp and cloudy summer weather as it is in winter. In all seasons, both day and night, the heat should be as dry as possible and maintained consistently at summer temperatures, using whatever means necessary to achieve this. After receiving the last coat, varnished work should remain in the varnishing room for one day before being moved to the general workroom.
A remark may be proper here, viz., that there is sometimes a failure to secure the best and most permanent results from not allowing sufficient time for and between the several processes. An order is perhaps to be filled, or for some other reason the goods are "rushed through" at the cost of thoroughness and excellence of finish.
A comment is relevant here, namely that there can be a lack of achieving the best and most lasting results due to not allowing enough time for and between the various processes. An order might need to be completed quickly, or for some other reason, the goods are "fast-tracked" at the expense of thoroughness and quality of finish.
The following suggestion is made by way of caution in reference to the disposal of oily rags and waste made in the various processes of finishing. These articles are regarded as very dangerous, and are frequently the cause of much controversy between insurance companies and parties who are insured. The best way to dispose of this waste is to put it into the stove and 56burn it as fast as it is produced. If this rule is strictly adhered to there will be no danger of fire from this source. All liquid stock should be kept in close cans or barrels, and as far from the fire as possible.
The following suggestion is made as a precaution regarding the disposal of oily rags and waste generated in various finishing processes. These items are considered very dangerous and often lead to disputes between insurance companies and those they insure. The best way to dispose of this waste is to put it in the stove and 56burn it as quickly as it is produced. If this guideline is strictly followed, there will be no fire hazard from this source. All liquid materials should be stored in tightly sealed cans or barrels, and kept as far away from the fire as possible.
CHAPTER VIII.
ENAMELLING.
The process of enamelling in oil varnishes as applied to furniture must be understood as a smooth, glossy surface of various colours produced by bodies of paint and varnish skilfully rubbed down, and prepared in a peculiar way so as to produce a surface equal to French polish. Ornament can be added by gilding, etc., after the polished surface is finished.
The process of enamelling in oil varnishes for furniture should be seen as creating a smooth, glossy surface in various colors, achieved through a careful application of paint and varnish that’s polished down and prepared in a specific way to match the quality of French polish. Decorative elements can be added, like gilding, after the polished surface is complete.
We will begin with the white or light-tinted enamel. The same process must be pursued for any colour, the only difference being in the selection of the materials for the tint required to be produced.
We will start with the white or light-colored enamel. The same procedure should be followed for any color, with the only difference being the choice of materials needed to achieve the desired tint.
It should be observed that enamelling requires the exercise of the greatest care, and will not bear hurrying. Each coat must be allowed sufficient time for the hardening, and the rubbing down must be patiently and gently done; heavy pressure will completely spoil the work.
It’s important to note that enameling needs a lot of care and can't be rushed. Each layer needs enough time to harden, and the sanding must be done slowly and gently; applying too much pressure can ruin the entire project.
Materials.—The materials used for the purpose above named are: white lead ground in 58turpentine and the best white lead in oil; a clear, quick, and hard-drying varnish, such as the best copal, or the varnishes for enamel manufactured by Mr. W. Urquhart, 327, Edgware Road, W.; or white coburg and white enamel varnish, ground and lump pumice-stone, or putty-powder, great care being taken in the selection of the pumice-stone, as the slightest particle of grit will spoil the surface; and rotten-stone, used either with water or oil.
Materials.—The materials used for this purpose are: white lead mixed with 58turpentine and the best white lead in oil; a clear, fast-drying varnish, like the best copal, or the enamel varnishes made by Mr. W. Urquhart, 327, Edgware Road, W.; or white coburg and white enamel varnish, along with ground and lump pumice stone, or putty powder, with great care taken in selecting the pumice stone, as even the tiniest bit of grit can ruin the surface; and rotten stone, used either with water or oil.
Tools.—The tools required are several flat wooden blocks, of various sizes and forms, suitable for inserting into corners and for mouldings—these must be covered with felt on the side you intend to use, the felt best adapted for the purpose being the white felt, from a quarter to half an inch in thickness, which can be obtained of Messrs. Thomas Wallis & Co., Holborn Circus, or at the woollen warehouses; two or three bosses (made similar to polish rubbers) of cotton-wool, and covered with silk (an old silk handkerchief makes capital coverings); wash or chamois leather, and a good sponge.
Tools.—You'll need several flat wooden blocks in various sizes and shapes, suitable for getting into corners and for molding—these should be covered with felt on the side that you'll be using. The best type of felt for this is white felt, about a quarter to half an inch thick, which you can get from Messrs. Thomas Wallis & Co. in Holborn Circus or at woollen warehouses. You’ll also need two or three cotton-wool pads (similar to polish rubbers) covered with silk (an old silk handkerchief works great for the coverings), some wash or chamois leather, and a good sponge.
Mode of Operation.—If the wood is soft and porous it is best to commence with a coating of size and whiting applied in a warm state, which is allowed to dry; it is then rubbed down with 59glass-paper, and two coats of common paint given, mixed in the usual way and of the same colour as you intend to finish with. In practice this is found to be best; after these two coats are thoroughly dry, mix the white-lead ground in turps, with only a sufficient quantity of varnish to bind it, thinning to a proper consistency with turps. It is as well to add a little of the ordinary white-lead ground in oil, as it helps to prevent cracking. Give the work four or five coats of this, and allow each coat to dry thoroughly. When it is hard and ready for rubbing down, commence with a soft piece of pumice-stone and water, and rub just sufficient to take off the roughness. Now use the felt-covered rubbers and ground pumice-stone, and cut it down, working in a circular manner. The greatest care is required to obtain a level surface free from scratches.
Mode of Operation.—If the wood is soft and porous, it’s best to start with a coat of size and whiting applied warm, and let it dry. Then, sand it down with 59sandpaper, and apply two coats of regular paint mixed in the usual way, using the same color as your final finish. In practice, this method works best; after the two coats are completely dry, mix white-lead ground in turpentine with just enough varnish to bind it, thinning to the right consistency with turpentine. It’s also good to add a little ordinary white-lead ground in oil, which helps prevent cracking. Apply four or five coats of this mixture, allowing each coat to dry thoroughly. Once it’s hard and ready for sanding, start with a soft piece of pumice stone and water, rubbing just enough to remove roughness. Next, use felt-covered rubbers and ground pumice stone, working in a circular motion to smooth it down. Take extra care to achieve a level surface free from scratches.
After the work is well rubbed down, if it should appear to be insufficiently filled up, or if scratched, give it two more coats, laid on very smoothly, and rub down as before. If properly done, it will be perfectly smooth and free from scratches. Wash it well down, and be careful to clean off all the loose pumice-stone. Then mix flake-white from the tube with either of the above-named varnishes, till it is of the consistency of cream. Give one coat of this, and when dry give it another, adding more varnish. Let this dry hard, the time taken for which will of course depend upon the drying qualities of the varnish; 60some will polish in eight or nine days, but it is much the best to let it stand as long as you possibly can, as the harder it is, the brighter and more enduring will be the polish. When sufficiently hard, use the felt, and very finely-ground pumice-stone and water; with this cut down till it is perfectly smooth; then let it stand for a couple of days, to harden the surface.
After the work is sanded down well, if it looks like it isn’t filled enough or has scratches, apply two more smooth coats and sand it down again as before. If done right, it will be completely smooth and free of scratches. Clean it thoroughly, making sure to remove all the loose pumice stone. Then mix flake white from the tube with one of the varnishes mentioned until it’s the consistency of cream. Apply one coat of this, and once it’s dry, apply another, adding more varnish. Let this dry completely; the time it takes will depend on how quickly the varnish dries. Some will be ready to polish in eight or nine days, but it’s best to let it sit as long as possible, as a harder finish will lead to a brighter and longer-lasting polish. Once it’s hard enough, use felt and very finely ground pumice stone mixed with water to polish it until it’s perfectly smooth; then let it sit for a couple of days to harden the surface.
Polishing.—In commencing to bring up a polish, first take rotten-stone, either in oil or water; use this with the felt rubber for a little while, then put some upon the surface of the silk-covered boss, and commence to rub very gently in circular strokes; continue this till there is a fine equal surface all over. The polish will begin to appear as you proceed, but it will be of a dull sort. Clean off: if the rotten-stone is in oil, clean off with dry flour; if in water, wash off with sponge and leather, taking care that you wash it perfectly clean and do not scratch.
Polishing.—To start polishing, first take rotten-stone, either in oil or water; use this with the felt rubber for a while, then apply some to the surface of the silk-covered boss, and begin to rub very gently in circular motions. Keep this up until you get a smooth, even surface all over. The polish will start to show as you go, but it will be somewhat dull. Clean off: if the rotten-stone is in oil, wipe it off with dry flour; if in water, wash it off with a sponge and leather, making sure to clean it thoroughly without scratching.
You will now, after having washed your hands, use a clean damp chamois leather, holding it in the left hand, and using the right to polish with, keeping it clean by frequently drawing it over the damp leather. With the ball of the right hand press gently upon the work, and draw your hand sharply, forward or towards you; this will produce a bright polish, and every time you bring 61your hand forward a sharp shrill sound will be heard similar to rubbing on glass. Continue this till the whole surface is one bright even polish. It will be some time before you will be able to do this perfectly, especially if the skin is dry or hard, as it is then liable to scratch the work. A smooth, soft skin will produce the best polish.
You will now, after washing your hands, use a clean damp chamois leather, holding it in your left hand and using your right hand to polish. Keep it clean by frequently drawing it over the damp leather. With the ball of your right hand, press gently on the surface and pull your hand sharply forward or towards you; this will create a bright polish, and each time you bring your hand forward, a sharp, shrill sound will be emitted, similar to rubbing on glass. Continue this until the entire surface has a consistent bright polish. It will take some time before you can do this perfectly, especially if the skin is dry or hard, as it can scratch the work. A smooth, soft skin will yield the best polish.
For the interior of houses, the "Albarine" enamel manufactured by the Yorkshire Varnish Company, of Ripon, is recommended. This article combines in itself a perfectly hard solid enamel of the purest possible colour; and for all interior decorations, where purity of colour and brilliancy of finish are desired, it is universally admitted to be the most perfect article of the kind hitherto introduced to the trade. It is applied in the same manner as ordinary varnish.
For indoor spaces, the "Albarine" enamel made by the Yorkshire Varnish Company in Ripon is highly recommended. This product features an incredibly hard solid enamel with the purest color possible, and for all interior decorations where the clarity of color and a brilliant finish are important, it is widely recognized as the best option available in the market to date. It is applied just like regular varnish.
Another Process.—The preceding section describes the process of enamelling by oil varnishes, and the directions referring to the polishing will be found of value for the "polishing up" on painted imitations of woods or marbles. There is another process whereby an enamel can be produced upon furniture at a much cheaper rate than the preceding, and one too, perhaps, in which a polisher may feel more "at home." The work should first have a coating of size and whiting (well strained); this will act as a pore-filler. When dry, rub down with fine paper, after which use the felt-covered rubber and 62powdered pumice-stone, to remove all the scratches caused by the glass-paper and to obtain a smooth and good surface. Then proceed to make a solution for the enamel: first procure two ounces of common isinglass from the druggist's, and thoroughly dissolve it in about a pint of boiling water; when dissolved, stir in two ounces and a-half of subnitrate of bismuth—this will be found to be about the right quantity for most woods, but it can be varied to suit the requirements. With this give the work one coat, boiling hot; apply it with a soft piece of Turkey sponge, or a broad camel's-hair brush, and when dry cut down with powdered pumice-stone; if a second coat is required, serve in precisely the same manner. Then proceed to polish in the ordinary way with white polish. After wetting the rubber, sprinkle a small quantity of the subnitrate of bismuth upon it; then put on the cover, and work in the usual manner; continue this till a sufficient body is obtained, and after allowing a sufficient time for the sinking and hardening it can be spirited off.
Another Process.—The previous section outlines the method of enameling using oil varnishes, and the tips for polishing will be useful for finishing painted imitations of wood or marble. There’s another method that allows you to create an enamel on furniture at a much lower cost than the one before, which might feel more familiar to a polisher. First, apply a coat of size and whiting (well strained); this will serve as a pore-filler. Once it's dry, sand it down with fine paper, then use a felt-covered rubber and 62powdered pumice stone to eliminate all scratches from the sandpaper and achieve a smooth surface. Next, prepare a solution for the enamel: first, get two ounces of common isinglass from the pharmacy and completely dissolve it in about a pint of boiling water; once dissolved, mix in two and a half ounces of subnitrate of bismuth—this should be the right amount for most woods, but you can adjust it to fit your needs. Apply a coat of this solution while it’s boiling hot; use a soft piece of Turkey sponge or a broad camel’s-hair brush, and once dry, sand it down with powdered pumice stone; if a second coat is needed, apply it exactly the same way. Then polish it in the usual manner with white polish. After wetting the rubber, sprinkle a little bit of subnitrate of bismuth on it; then cover it and work it in as you normally would; continue this process until you have enough thickness, and after allowing sufficient time for it to settle and harden, it can be polished off.
Enamelled furniture has had, comparatively speaking, rather a dull sale, but there is no class of furniture more susceptible of being made to please the fancy of the many than this. It can be made in any tint that may be required by the application of Judson's dyes, and the exercise of a little skill in the decoration will produce very pleasing effects. 63
Enamelled furniture has had, relatively speaking, a pretty lackluster sale, but there’s no type of furniture more capable of appealing to people's tastes than this. It can be produced in any color needed using Judson's dyes, and with just a bit of skill in decoration, it can create very attractive results. 63
Decorations.—The decorations are usually ornaments drawn in gold. A cut-out stencil pattern is generally used, and the surface brushed over with a camel's-hair pencil and japanner's gold size, which can be obtained at the artist's colourman's, or, if preferred, can be made by boiling 4 ozs. of linseed-oil with 1 oz. of gum anîme and a little vermilion. When the size is tacky, or nearly dry, gold powder or gold leaf is applied. The gold is gently pressed down with a piece of wadding, and when dry the surplus can be removed with a round camel's-hair tool. In all cases where gold has been fixed by this process it will bear washing without coming off, which is a great advantage.
Decorations.—The decorations are typically ornaments created in gold. A cut-out stencil pattern is usually used, and the surface is brushed over with a camel's-hair pencil and japanner's gold size, which can be found at the artist's supply store, or if preferred, can be made by boiling 4 ounces of linseed oil with 1 ounce of gum anime and a bit of vermilion. When the size is tacky or nearly dry, gold powder or gold leaf is applied. The gold is gently pressed down with a piece of wadding, and once dry, any excess can be removed with a round camel's-hair tool. In all cases where gold has been fixed using this method, it will withstand washing without coming off, which is a significant advantage.
CHAPTER IX.
AMERICAN POLISHING PROCESSES
The method of polishing furniture practised by the American manufacturers differs considerably from the French polishing processes adopted by manufacturers in most European countries. This difference, however, is mostly compulsory, and is attributable to the climate. The intense heat of summer and the extreme cold of winter will soon render a French polish useless, and as a consequence numerous experiments have been tried to obtain a polish for furniture that will resist heat or cold. The writer has extracted from two American cabinet-trade journals, The Cabinet-maker and The Trade Bureau, descriptions of the various processes now used in the States, which descriptions were evidently contributed by practical workmen. The following pages are not, strictly speaking, a mere reprint from the above-named journals, the articles having been carefully revised and re-written after having been practically tested; attention to them is, therefore, strongly recommended. 65
The way American manufacturers polish furniture is quite different from the French polishing methods used by manufacturers in most European countries. This difference is mainly due to the climate. The intense heat in summer and the extreme cold in winter can quickly make a French polish ineffective. As a result, many experiments have been conducted to find a furniture polish that can withstand heat and cold. The author has gathered information from two American cabinet trade journals, The Cabinet-maker and The Trade Bureau, which include descriptions of the various processes currently used in the United States, contributed by skilled workers. The following pages are not just a simple reprint from these journals; the articles have been thoroughly revised and rewritten after practical testing. Therefore, it is highly recommended to pay attention to them. 65
In these processes the work is first filled in with a "putty filler," and after the surface has been thoroughly cleaned it is ready for shellac or varnish. Second, a coating of shellac is next applied with a brush or a soft piece of Turkey sponge. This mixture is composed of two parts (by weight) of shellac to one of methylated spirits, but what is called "thin shellac" is composed of one part shellac to two of spirits. After the coating is laid on and allowed to dry, which it does very soon, it is rubbed carefully with fine flour glass-paper, or powdered pumice-stone—about four coats are usually given, each one rubbed down as directed. Third, when the surface has received a sufficient body, get a felt-covered rubber and apply rotten-stone and sweet oil in the same manner as you would clean brass; with this give the work a good rubbing, so as to produce a polish. Fourth, clean off with a rag and sweet oil, and rub dry; then take a soft rag with a few drops of spirit upon it, and vapour up to a fine polish. With these few preliminary remarks, the following will be easily understood.
In these processes, the work is first filled with a "putty filler," and after the surface is thoroughly cleaned, it’s ready for shellac or varnish. Next, a coat of shellac is applied with a brush or a soft piece of Turkey sponge. This mixture consists of two parts (by weight) of shellac to one part of methylated spirits, but what is called "thin shellac" is made up of one part shellac to two parts spirits. After the coating is applied and allowed to dry, which happens quickly, it is carefully rubbed with fine flour glass-paper or powdered pumice-stone—about four coats are usually applied, each one rubbed down as instructed. Then, when the surface has built up enough, take a felt-covered rubber and apply rotten-stone and sweet oil in the same way you would clean brass; use this to give the work a good rub for a polish. Finally, wipe off with a rag and sweet oil and rub dry; then use a soft rag with a few drops of spirit on it to vapor up to a fine polish. With these few preliminary notes, the following will be easy to understand.
Use Of Fillers.—The cost of a putty filler consists chiefly in the time consumed in applying it. In the matter of walnut-filling much expense is saved in the processes of coating and rubbing if the pores of the wood be filled to the surface with a substance that will not shrink, and will harden 66quickly. The time occupied in spreading and cleaning a thin or fatty mixture of filler, or a stiff and brittle putty made fresh every day, is about the same, and while the thin mixture will be subject to a great shrinkage, the putty filler will hold its own. It will thus be seen that a proper regard to the materials used in making fillers, and the consistency and freshness of the same, form an important element in the economy of filling.
Use of Fillers.—The cost of a putty filler mainly comes from the time it takes to apply it. When it comes to walnut filling, a lot of money can be saved during the coating and rubbing processes if the wood's pores are filled to the surface with a substance that won’t shrink and hardens 66quickly. The time spent spreading and cleaning a thin or fatty filler mixture, or a fresh batch of stiff and brittle putty made daily, is roughly the same. However, the thin mixture is likely to shrink a lot, while the putty filler will maintain its integrity. Therefore, it’s clear that choosing the right materials for fillers, along with their consistency and freshness, is a crucial factor in the cost-effectiveness of filling.
A principal cause of poor filling is the use of thin material. By some a putty-knife is used, and the filling rubbed into the surfaces of mouldings with tow, while others use only the tow for all surfaces, mostly, however, in cases of dry filling. In the use of the wet filler, either with a knife or with tow, workmen are prone to spread it too thin because it requires less effort, but experience shows that the greatest care should always be taken to spread the putty stiff and thick, notwithstanding the complaints of workmen. In fact, this class of work does not bring into play so much muscle as to warrant complaints on account of it. Nor can there be any reasonable excuse for taking a longer time to spread a stiff filler than a thin filler.
A main reason for poor filling is the use of thin material. Some people use a putty knife and rub the filling into the surfaces of moldings with tow, while others only use the tow for all surfaces, mostly in cases of dry filling. When using a wet filler, whether with a knife or tow, workers tend to spread it too thin because it takes less effort, but experience shows that the greatest care should always be taken to apply the putty thick and with substance, despite workers' complaints. In reality, this type of work doesn’t require so much physical strength that it justifies those complaints. There is also no valid reason for taking longer to spread a stiff filler than a thin one.
Good results are not always obtained by the use of thick fillers, because the putty is spread too soon after the application of the first coat of oil, which liquid should be quite thin, and reduced either with benzine or turpentine, so that when 67the putty is forced into the pores the oil already in them will have the effect of thinning it. As an illustration of the idea meant here to be conveyed, we will suppose a quantity of thick mud or peat dumped into a cavity containing water, and a similar quantity of the same material dumped into another cavity having no water; the one fills the bottom of the cavity solid, while the other becomes partly liquid at the bottom, and must of necessity shrink before it assumes the solidity of the former. Hence it appears that work to be filled should be oiled and allowed to stand some time before receiving the filler, or until the oil has been absorbed into the pores.
Good results aren't always achieved by using thick fillers because the putty is applied too soon after the first coat of oil, which should be pretty thin and mixed with either benzine or turpentine. This way, when 67the putty gets pushed into the pores, the oil already there will help thin it out. To illustrate this, imagine dumping a bunch of thick mud or peat into a hole filled with water, and the same amount into another hole that's dry. In the first case, it fills the bottom solidly, while in the second, it becomes partly liquid at the bottom and has to shrink before it can become solid like the first one. So it seems that the surface to be filled should be oiled and left for a while before adding the filler, or until the oil is absorbed into the pores.
The preparatory coating should not be mixed so as to dry too quickly, nor allowed to stand too long before introducing the putty, for in this case the putty when forced along by the knife will not slip so easily as it should.
The prep coat shouldn't be mixed to dry too quickly, nor should it be left standing for too long before adding the putty, because in that case, the putty will not slide easily along when pushed with the knife as it should.
The cost of rubbing and sand-papering in the finishing process is very much lessened if the cleaning be thorough, and if all the corners and mouldings be scraped out, so that pieces of putty do not remain to work up into the first coat of shellac, or whatever finish may be used as a substitute for shellac.
The expense of sanding and finishing is significantly reduced if the cleaning is done properly, and if all the corners and moldings are scraped out, preventing any bits of putty from mixing into the first coat of shellac or any other finish that might replace shellac.
Another important feature in hard filling is to let the work be well dried before applying the first coat of finish. One day is not sufficient for the proper drying of putty fillers, and if in consequence of insufficient drying a part of the 68filling washes out, it is so much labour lost. As a safeguard against washing out, these fillers should be mixed with as much dryer or japan as the case warrants, for it frequently occurs that work must be finished, or go into finish, the day following the filling, whether it be dry or not.
Another important aspect of hard filling is to ensure the work is fully dried before applying the first coat of finish. One day isn’t enough time for putty fillers to dry properly, and if any of the 68filling washes out due to inadequate drying, it results in wasted effort. To prevent washing out, these fillers should be mixed with as much dryer or japan as needed since it often happens that the work needs to be finished or to go into finish the day after the filling, regardless of whether it’s dry or not.
By observing the main facts here alluded to, good filling may always be obtained, and at a cost not exceeding that of poor work.
By keeping in mind the key points mentioned here, you can always achieve a quality result without spending more than you would on subpar work.
For the light woods, including ash, chestnut, and oak, the filling is similar to that used in walnut, except the colouring material, which, of course, must be slight, or just enough to prevent the whiting and plaster from showing white in the pores. This colouring may consist of raw sienna, burnt sienna, or a trifle raw, or umber; one of these ingredients separate, or all three combined, mixed so as to please the fancy and suit the prevailing style. The colouring may be used with a dry filling, although a wet filling is more likely to give a smooth finish and greater satisfaction, and the colour of the filler can be seen better in the putty than in the dry powder.
For lighter woods like ash, chestnut, and oak, the filling is similar to what’s used with walnut, except the coloring material should be minimal—just enough to stop the white whiting and plaster from showing in the pores. This coloring can be made from raw sienna, burnt sienna, or a bit of raw umber; any of these ingredients can be used separately or all three together, mixed to match personal taste and the overall style. The coloring can be applied with a dry filler, although a wet filler is more likely to result in a smooth finish and greater satisfaction, and the color of the filler shows up better in the putty than in the dry powder.
Upon cheap work a filler should be used that requires the least amount of labour in its application. For this purpose liquid fillers, like japan, are suitable. If, however, a fine finish on fine goods is required, the putty compositions of various mixtures are the more appropriate. The secret of the process of filling consists in the mix69ing of the compounds and the method of using them. A liquid filler or a japan simply spread over the work in one or two coats can hardly be called filling, yet this will serve the purpose very well for cheap furniture.
For inexpensive work, you should use a filler that requires the least effort to apply. Liquid fillers, like Japan or shellac, are ideal for this. However, if you need a smooth finish on high-quality items, putty made from various mixtures is a better choice. The key to the filling process lies in how you mix the compounds and apply them. A liquid filler or Japan simply brushed on in one or two coats hardly qualifies as filling, but it works perfectly well for budget furniture.
Thick compositions or putty fillers are composed of whiting and plaster, or similar powders having little or no colour. This material is mixed with oil, japan, and benzine, with a sufficient quantity of colouring matter to please the fancy. The value of these fillers is in proportion to their brittleness or "shortness," as it is termed, and, to give them this quality, plaster is used and as much benzine or turpentine as the mixture will bear without being too stiff or too hard to clean off. Sometimes a little dissolved shellac is used to produce "shortness." This desirable feature of a filler is best effected by mixing a small quantity of the material at a time. Many workmen mistakenly mix large batches at a time with a view of securing uniformity of colour, and this is one cause why such fillers work tough and produce a poor surface. An oil mixture soon becomes fatty and tough, and must be reduced in consistency when used, as it is apt when old to "drag" and leave the pores only partly filled. These fillers should be mixed fresh every day, and allowed to stiffen and solidify in the wood rather than out of it.
Thick compositions or putty fillers consist of whiting and plaster, or similar powders that have little or no color. This material is mixed with oil, japan, and benzene, along with enough coloring agent to suit individual taste. The quality of these fillers depends on their brittleness or "shortness," as it's called, and to achieve this property, plaster is added along with as much benzene or turpentine as the mixture can handle without becoming too stiff or difficult to clean off. Sometimes, a bit of dissolved shellac is used to enhance "shortness." The best way to achieve this desirable feature is by mixing a small amount of material at a time. Many workers mistakenly mix large batches to ensure consistent color, which is one reason these fillers become tough and result in a poor surface. An oil mixture can quickly become greasy and tough, and must be thinned when used, as it can "drag" and leave the pores only partially filled when it gets old. These fillers should be mixed fresh every day and allowed to harden and solidify in the wood rather than out of it.
Making Fillers.—In making "fillers," a quantity of the japan which is used in the ingredients can be made at one time, and used from as occasion may require. It is made in the following manner:
Making Fillers.—To make "fillers," you can prepare a batch of the japan used in the ingredients at once and use it as needed. It's made in the following way:
Japan of the Best Quality.—Put ¾ lb. gum shellac into 1 gall. linseed-oil; take ½ lb. each of litharge, burnt umber, and red-lead, also 6 oz. sugar of lead. Boil in the mixture of shellac and oil until all are dissolved; this will require about four hours. Remove from the fire, and stir in 1 gall. of spirits of turpentine, and the work is finished.
Japan of the Best Quality.—Dissolve ¾ lb. of gum shellac in 1 gallon of linseed oil. Add ½ lb. each of litharge, burnt umber, and red lead, along with 6 oz. of sugar of lead. Boil this mixture of shellac and oil until everything is dissolved; this will take about four hours. Take it off the heat and mix in 1 gallon of turpentine, and you’re done.
Fillings for Light Woods.—Take 5 lb. of whiting, 3 lb. calcined plaster (plaster of Paris), ½ gall. of raw linseed-oil, 1 qt. of spirits of turpentine, 1 qt. of brown japan, and a little French yellow to tinge the white. Mix well, and apply with a brush; rub it well with excelsior or tow, and clean off with rags. This thoroughly fills the pores of the wood and preserves its natural colour.
Fillings for Light Woods.—Take 5 lbs. of whiting, 3 lbs. of calcined plaster (plaster of Paris), ½ gallon of raw linseed oil, 1 quart of turpentine, 1 quart of brown japan, and a little French yellow to tint the white. Mix everything well and apply it with a brush; rub it in thoroughly with excelsior or tow, and clean off with rags. This completely fills the wood's pores and keeps its natural color.
Another for Light Woods.—Take 10 lb. of whiting, 5 lb. of calcined plaster, 1 lb. of corn starch, 3 oz. calcined magnesia, 1 gall. of raw linseed-oil, ½ gall. spirits of turpentine, 1 qt. of brown japan, 2 oz. French yellow. Mix well, 71and apply with brush; rub in well with excelsior or tow, and clean off with rags.
Another for Light Woods.—Take 10 lbs. of whiting, 5 lbs. of calcined plaster, 1 lb. of corn starch, 3 oz. of calcined magnesia, 1 gallon of raw linseed oil, ½ gallon of spirits of turpentine, 1 quart of brown japan, and 2 oz. of French yellow. Mix everything thoroughly, 71and apply with a brush; rub in well with excelsior or tow, and wipe off with rags.
For Mahogany or Cherry Wood.—Take 5 lb. of whiting, 2 lb. of calcined plaster, 1½ oz. dry burnt sienna, 1 oz. Venetian red, 1 qt. of boiled linseed-oil, 1 pt. of spirits of turpentine, and 1 pt. of brown japan. Mix well, apply with brush, and rub well in with excelsior or tow. Clean off with rags dry.
For Mahogany or Cherry Wood.—Take 5 lbs. of whiting, 2 lbs. of calcined plaster, 1½ oz. of dry burnt sienna, 1 oz. of Venetian red, 1 quart of boiled linseed oil, 1 pint of turpentine, and 1 pint of brown japan. Mix everything thoroughly, apply with a brush, and rub it in well with excelsior or tow. Clean off with dry rags.
For Oak Wood.—Take 5 lb. of whiting, 2 lb. calcined plaster, 1 oz. dry burnt sienna, ½ oz. of dry French yellow, 1 qt. raw linseed-oil, 1 pt. benzine spirits, and ½ pt. white shellac. Mix well, apply with brush, rub in with excelsior or tow, and clean off with rags.
For Oak Wood.—Take 5 lbs. of whiting, 2 lbs. of calcined plaster, 1 oz. of dry burnt sienna, ½ oz. of dry French yellow, 1 qt. of raw linseed oil, 1 pt. of benzine spirits, and ½ pt. of white shellac. Mix well, apply with a brush, rub in with excelsior or tow, and clean off with rags.
For Rosewood.—Take 6 lb. of fine whiting, 2 lb. of calcined plaster, 1 lb. of rose-pink, 2 oz. of Venetian red, ½ lb. of Vandyke brown, ½ lb. of Brandon red, 1 gall. of boiled linseed-oil, ½ gall. of spirits of turpentine, 1 qt. of black japan. Mix well together, apply with brush, rub well in with tow, and clean off with rags.
For Rosewood.—Take 6 lbs. of fine whiting, 2 lbs. of calcined plaster, 1 lb. of rose-pink, 2 oz. of Venetian red, ½ lb. of Vandyke brown, ½ lb. of Brandon red, 1 gallon of boiled linseed oil, ½ gallon of turpentine, and 1 quart of black Japan. Mix everything together, apply it with a brush, rub it in well with tow, and clean off with rags.
For Black Walnut (1).—For medium and cheap work. Take 10 lb. of whiting, 3 lb. dry burnt umber, 4 lb. of Vandyke brown, 3 lb. of calcined plaster, ½ lb. of Venetian red, 1 gall. of boiled linseed-oil, ½ gall. of spirits of turpentine, 1 qt. of black japan. Mix well and apply with brush; rub well with excelsior or tow, and clean off with rags.
For Black Walnut (1).—For medium and budget work. Use 10 lbs. of whiting, 3 lbs. dry burnt umber, 4 lbs. of Vandyke brown, 3 lbs. of calcined plaster, ½ lb. of Venetian red, 1 gallon of boiled linseed oil, ½ gallon of turpentine, and 1 quart of black japan. Mix thoroughly and apply with a brush; rub well with excelsior or tow, and clean off with rags.
For Black Walnut (2).—An improved filling, 72producing a fine imitation of wax finish, may be effected by taking 5 lb. of whiting, with 1 lb. of calcined plaster, 6 oz. of calcined magnesia, 1 oz. of dry burnt umber, 1 oz. of French yellow to tinge the white. Add 1 qt. of raw linseed-oil, 1 qt. of benzine spirits, ½ pt. of very thin white shellac. Mix well, and apply with a brush; rub well in, and clean off with rags.
For Black Walnut (2).—An improved filling, 72that creates a nice imitation of a wax finish can be made by combining 5 lbs. of whiting, 1 lb. of calcined plaster, 6 oz. of calcined magnesia, 1 oz. of dry burnt umber, and 1 oz. of French yellow to tint the white. Add 1 qt. of raw linseed oil, 1 qt. of benzine spirits, and ½ pt. of very thin white shellac. Mix everything thoroughly and apply it with a brush; rub it in well, and wipe off any excess with rags.
An Oil-Colour for Black Walnut (3), to be used only on first-class and custom work.—Take 3 lb. of burnt umber ground in oil, 1 lb. of burnt sienna ground in oil, 1 qt. of spirits of turpentine, 1 pt. of brown japan. Mix well and apply with a brush. Sand-paper well; clean off with tow and rags. This gives a beautiful chocolate colour to the wood.
An Oil-Colour for Black Walnut (3), to be used only on high-quality and custom work.—Take 3 pounds of burnt umber ground in oil, 1 pound of burnt sienna ground in oil, 1 quart of turpentine, and 1 pint of brown japan. Mix thoroughly and apply with a brush. Sand it well; clean off with tow and rags. This creates a beautiful chocolate color on the wood.
Numerous compositions are in the market for filling the pores of wood, and in this connection particular attention has been given to walnut, for the reason that this wood is used in large quantities in the furniture industry, and is nearly, if not quite, as porous as any other of the woods used.
Numerous products are available for filling the pores of wood, and particular attention has been focused on walnut because this wood is widely used in the furniture industry and is almost, if not completely, as porous as other types of wood used.
A variety of walnut fillings have been recommended to the trade in order to meet the demand consequent upon the different grades of finish and the method of obtaining the finish, so that it would be difficult to pronounce as to the superiority of any one filling for general purposes. In treating this subject, attention should be given to the necessities for the use of filling, so that each one 73may determine for himself the kind of composition best adapted for the work in hand, and the best method of applying it.
A range of walnut fillers has been suggested to the industry to satisfy the demand resulting from various levels of finishing and the techniques used to achieve them, making it hard to declare any single filler as the best for general use. When discussing this topic, it’s important to consider the need for fillers, so that everyone 73can decide for themselves which type of formula is most suitable for their specific project and the best way to apply it.
Finishing.—Having described the methods of making and applying the "fillings," we will now describe the mode of finishing, and begin with the "dead-oil finish." We can remember when a satisfactory oil-finish was produced either with a good quality of japan or a fair quality of spirits. These materials are recommended to be used by inexperienced workmen and those not familiar with the mixing of the various grades of japan and varnish with oil, turpentine, benzine, etc. This method of oil-finish, too, is scarcely inferior to the shellac or spirit-varnish method, and it is cheaper. When the best finish is desired, a sufficient number of coats to fill the pores of wood to a level are required, and then the whole surface should be subjected to the rubbing process. The use of these fillers provides an oil-finish in a simplified form for those who are not aware of the difference between hard and soft gum compositions as a base for rubbing. In fact, the rubbing process constitutes a fine oil-finish, and requires a hard gum, whether it be of japan, varnish, or shellac.
Finishing.—Having described the methods for making and applying the "fillings," let's now move on to finishing, starting with the "dead-oil finish." We remember when a satisfactory oil finish could be achieved using either a high-quality japan or a decent-quality spirits. These materials are recommended for beginners and those who are not familiar with mixing different grades of japan and varnish with oil, turpentine, benzine, etc. This method of oil finish is almost as good as the shellac or spirit-varnish method, and it's more cost-effective. When the best finish is desired, it's necessary to apply enough coats to fill the wood's pores evenly, and then the entire surface should be rubbed down. Using these fillers offers a simpler oil finish for those who may not know the difference between hard and soft gum compositions as a base for rubbing. In fact, the rubbing process itself delivers a fine oil finish and requires a hard gum, whether it’s from japan, varnish, or shellac.
The use of varnish or its substitute as a filler and finish is more frequent than the use of shellac, and for cheap work it is equally good. 74The surface produced by a hard gum composition must be smooth and dead, or but slightly glossed, so as to admit of the pores being filled full or to a level. It may be added that a coat or any number of coats of the composition referred to above is substantially a filling, and the quality of finish depends upon the number of coats, together with the amount of rubbing applied.
The use of varnish or its alternative as a filler and finish is more common than shellac, and for budget work, it works just as well. 74The surface created by a hard gum mixture should be smooth and flat, or only slightly shiny, so that the pores can be completely filled or leveled out. It's worth noting that a single coat or multiple coats of the mixture mentioned above essentially serves as a filler, and the quality of the finish depends on how many coats are applied and the level of rubbing performed.
Thus far we have simply called attention to the best quality of oil-finish and the manner of producing it. Possibly three-fourths of all wood-finishing, particularly walnut-finishing, is several degrees below the best quality. In fact, oil-finish may imply only one coat of any composition that will dry, while two coats may be regarded as fair, and three coats a very good quality of finish. For the class of finish not rubbed down with pumice-stone and water, oil-varnish would be out of place on account of its gloss; hence shellac, being in composition similar to japan, is the better material, because of its dull appearance or lack of gloss as compared with shellac.
So far, we've just pointed out the best quality of oil finish and how to produce it. Likely, about three-quarters of all wood finishing, especially walnut finishing, is several steps below the best quality. In reality, oil finish might just mean one coat of any formula that will dry, while two coats can be considered decent, and three coats represent a very good finish. For finishes that aren’t smoothed down with pumice stone and water, oil varnish wouldn’t be suitable because of its shine; therefore, shellac, which is similar in composition to Japan, is a better choice due to its matte look or lack of shine compared to shellac.
In addition to the liquid fillers already mentioned, there is a putty or powder filling used for cross-grained woods, or such woods as have a deep pore. This filling is forced into the wood previous to the application of the other finishing compounds, with the use of which it in no way interferes. On the contrary, it economises the use of the liquid fillers, and, while constituting a part of an oil-finish, is also a finish wholly independent of 75the other methods mentioned—that is to say, the same results can be obtained by the use of either one, although the putty or powder filling is attended with greater expense both as to time and material. The hard filling is generally used on walnut, ash, and all coarse-grained woods.
In addition to the liquid fillers mentioned earlier, there’s a putty or powder filling used for woods with cross-grain or deep pores. This filling is pushed into the wood before applying the other finishing products, without interfering with them at all. In fact, it helps reduce the amount of liquid fillers needed, and while it’s part of an oil finish, it can also serve as a completely independent finish. This means you can achieve the same results with either method, although using the putty or powder filling is generally more costly in terms of both time and materials. The hard filling is typically used on walnut, ash, and all coarse-grained woods.
With regard to oil-finishes, viz., spirit-varnish or oil-varnish, shellac is thought by many to be the best for fine work; but others think differently. We may say of shellac that it will finish up into any degree of polish, and while it will not retain a French polish long in this climate, it will replenish easier and cheaper than any other finish, and continue to improve under each application. For a common finish, however, oil preparation is as good as shellac, and even for a fine finish it is only second to shellac, if made of a hard gum. On common finish, too, the oil will wear better than shellac in stock or on storage, so far as preserving its freshness is concerned.
When it comes to oil finishes, like spirit varnish or oil varnish, many people believe that shellac is the best option for fine work, although others disagree. We can say about shellac that it can be polished to any level of shine, and even though it doesn’t hold a French polish well in this climate, it can be refreshed more easily and cheaply than any other finish and continues to improve with each application. For a basic finish, though, oil preparation is just as good as shellac, and even for a fine finish, it ranks second to shellac if made from a hard resin. In terms of common finishes, oil will also wear better than shellac when stored, especially regarding how well it maintains its freshness.
The cost of oil-finish is governed chiefly by the amount of labour expended on it. A suite of walnut furniture can be well rubbed with sand-paper in two hours, or even less; while two weeks could be profitably employed in rubbing another suite with pumice and water.
The cost of oil finishing is mainly determined by how much labor is put into it. A set of walnut furniture can be nicely sanded in two hours or less, whereas two weeks could be effectively spent polishing another set with pumice and water.
Black Walnut Finishing.—The fashionable finish for black walnut work, particularly chamber sets, is what is known to the trade as the 76"dead-oil finish." It is admired, perhaps, because it has a gloss, rather than a shine of the varnish stamp. There is no more labour required upon it than upon a bright finish, but the process of manipulation is different, and harder to the fingers.
Black Walnut Finishing.—The trendy finish for black walnut furniture, especially bedroom sets, is referred to in the industry as the 76"dead-oil finish." It’s appreciated, perhaps, because it has a sheen rather than the gloss of varnish. It doesn’t require any more work than a glossy finish, but the technique involved is different and more challenging on the hands.
It should be premised that the walnut work of the day bears upon its surface, to a greater or less extent, raised panels covered with French burl veneer. And upon this fact largely depends the beauty of the production. And the endeavour is to so finish the article that there shall be a contrast between the panel and the groundwork on which it is placed. In other words, the former should be of a light colour, while the latter is of a darker shade. In that view the palest shellac should be used on the panels, and darker pieces, liver coloured, etc., on the body of the work. The darker grades of shellac are the cheaper, and will answer for the bulk of the work, but the clearest only for the panels.
It should be noted that the walnut furniture of today features, to varying degrees, raised panels covered with French burl veneer. The beauty of the piece largely depends on this. The goal is to finish the item in a way that creates a contrast between the panel and the base it’s mounted on. In other words, the panel should be a lighter color, while the base should be darker. To achieve this, the lightest shellac should be applied to the panels, and darker shades, like liver color, on the main body of the piece. The darker types of shellac are less expensive and can be used for most of the work, but only the clearest should be used for the panels.
In commencing to finish a job direct from the cabinet-maker's hand, rough and innocent of sand-paper, first cover the panels with a coat of shellac to prevent the oil in the filling from colouring them dark. Next, cover the body of the work with a wood filling composed of whiting and plaster of Paris, mixed with japan, benzine, and raw linseed-oil, or the lubricating oil made from petroleum; the whole covered with umber, to which, in the rare cases when a reddish shade is 77wanted, Venetian red is also added. This filling is then rubbed off with cloths, and by this process tends to close up the grain of the wood and produce an even surface. More or less time should be allowed after each of the several steps in the finishing process for the work to dry and harden, though much less is required in working with shellac than with varnishes composed of turpentine, oil, and gums. But the time that should be allowed is often lessened by the desire to get the work through as soon as possible, so that no standard can be set up as to the number of hours required between each of the several processes. It would be well if twelve hours intervened, but if work to which ten days could well be devoted must be hurried through in three, obviously the processes must follow each other in a corresponding haste.
In starting to finish a piece straight from the cabinet-maker, rough and without sandpaper, first coat the panels with shellac to stop the oil in the filling from darkening them. Next, apply a wood filler made of chalk and plaster of Paris, mixed with Japan varnish, benzene, and raw linseed oil, or petroleum-based lubricating oil; this is all topped with umber, and in rare cases where a reddish tint is 77desired, Venetian red is also added. This filling is then wiped off with cloths, and this process helps to close the wood grain and create a smooth surface. More or less time should be allowed for each step in the finishing process for the work to dry and harden, though less time is needed when working with shellac compared to varnishes made from turpentine, oil, and gums. However, this recommended drying time is often shortened by the urgency to complete the work quickly, making it hard to set a standard for the number of hours needed between each step. Ideally, there should be a twelve-hour gap, but if a job that could take ten days has to be completed in three, then the processes must obviously be completed in a similar hurry.
A coating of shellac is then given the whole work, light on the panels and dark on the body work, and when it has dried and hardened, which it does very soon, it may be rubbed down. This process of "rubbing down" should be done evenly and carefully, so as not to rub through the shellac at any point, and be done with the finer grades of sand-paper for the cheaper class of work, particularly at first, but at a later period of the process, and for the better class of articles in all cases, hair-cloth should be used, the material for the "rubbing down" being pumice-stone moistened with raw linseed-oil for the best work, and the 78lubricating oil, before mentioned, for cheaper work, or the covered parts of the better grades. This rubbing down involves labour, wear of fingers and finger-nails, and is carried on with an ordinary bit of hair-cloth, the smooth surface next the wood, and not made in any particular shape, but as a wad, ball, or otherwise. In the corners and crevices where the hair-cloth will not enter it will be necessary to use sand-paper of the finest grades, and worn pieces only.
A coating of shellac is then applied to the entire piece, light on the panels and dark on the body, and once it dries and hardens, which happens quickly, it can be smoothed out. This "smoothing out" process should be done evenly and carefully to avoid wearing through the shellac, and it's best to use finer grades of sandpaper for less expensive pieces, especially at the beginning. Later on and for higher quality items, hair-cloth should be used, with pumice-stone moistened with raw linseed oil being the ideal choice for the best results. For cheaper items or the covered parts of higher quality pieces, the previously mentioned lubricating oil can be used. This smoothing process requires effort, which can wear on your fingers and nails, and is done with a simple piece of hair-cloth, using the smooth side against the wood, shaped into a wad, ball, or another form. In corners and crevices where the hair-cloth won't fit, it's necessary to use the finest sandpaper, preferably worn pieces only.
Three coats of shellac are put on, followed each time by this rubbing-down process, each one giving the work a smoother feeling and a more perfect appearance. Afterwards, to complete the whole, a coating of japan thinned with benzine is applied, which gives to the work a clean appearance and the dead glossy finish.
Three coats of shellac are applied, each followed by a rubbing-down process, making the surface smoother and improving its appearance. Finally, to finish everything off, a layer of japan thinned with benzene is added, giving the work a clean look and a flat glossy finish.
There is this objection to the above style of finish, that the japan catches all the dust which touches it, and holds it permanently, so that many of the best workmen will not have work finished in this way for their own private houses, preferring the brighter look given by shellac and varnish without rubbing down the last coat, believing that the work can be kept much cleaner.
There’s an objection to the finish style mentioned above, which is that the japan finishes attract all the dust that comes into contact with them and hold onto it permanently. As a result, many skilled craftsmen won’t use this finish for their own homes, opting instead for the shinier appearance created by shellac and varnish without sanding the last coat, believing it’s easier to keep clean.
Finishing Veneered Panels, etc.—The large oval panels of desks, etc., covered with French veneer, are generally taken out and finished by themselves. The process is similar 79to that above given, with successive coats of shellac and varnish, and the oil and pumice-stone rubbing down; but the final part of this latter process is a rubbing down with rotten-stone; then the merest trifle of sweet-oil is applied all over the surface and wiped off. (See Rosewood, etc., farther on.)
Finishing Veneered Panels, etc.—The large oval panels of desks and similar items that are covered with French veneer are usually removed and finished separately. The process is similar 79to what was described earlier, involving multiple coats of shellac and varnish, followed by rubbing down with oil and pumice stone; however, the final step in this process includes rubbing down with rotten stone. Then, just a tiny amount of sweet oil is applied across the surface and wiped off. (See Rosewood, etc., later on.)
For Light Woods (Dead Finish).—Apply two or three coats of white shellac; rub down with pumice and raw linseed-oil, and clean off well with rags; use varnish-polish on the panels.
For Light Woods (Dead Finish).—Apply two or three coats of white shellac; sand with pumice and raw linseed oil, then wipe clean with rags; use varnish polish on the panels.
Another.—Finish as in the previous recipe. For a flowing coat of varnish-finish apply one flowing coat of light amber varnish. If a varnish-polish is desired, apply three coats of Zanzibar polishing varnish. Rub down and polish, and the result will be a splendid finish.
Another.—Finish just like in the previous recipe. For a smooth layer of varnish, apply one even coat of light amber varnish. If you want a varnish-polish, apply three coats of Zanzibar polishing varnish. Buff and polish, and the result will be a beautiful finish.
Mahogany or Cherry Wood.—For shellac dead finish apply two coats of yellow shellac. Rub down with pumice and raw linseed-oil. If a varnish-finish is desired, apply a flowing coat of light amber varnish or shellac thus rubbed. The panels should receive two coats of Zanzibar polishing varnish.
Mahogany or Cherry Wood.—For a shellac dead finish, apply two coats of yellow shellac. Smooth it out with pumice and raw linseed oil. If you want a varnish finish, apply a smooth coat of light amber varnish or shellac that has been rubbed down. The panels should get two coats of Zanzibar polishing varnish.
Oak.—For a dead finish give three coats of shellac, two-thirds of white and one-third of yellow, mixed. Rub down with pumice and raw linseed-oil. For a cheap varnish-finish give one flowing coat of light amber varnish in the shellac, rubbed as directed. Varnish-polish the panels.
Oak.—For a dead finish, apply three coats of shellac, using two parts white and one part yellow, mixed together. Smooth it out with pumice and raw linseed oil. For a budget-friendly varnish finish, apply one thin coat of light amber varnish mixed with the shellac, and rub it down as instructed. Use varnish polish on the panels.
Rosewood, Coromandel, or Kingwood (a Bright 80Finish).—Apply two thin coats of shellac, sand-papering each coat; then apply three or four coats of Zanzibar polishing varnish, laying it on thin, and giving it sufficient time to dry thoroughly. When it is perfectly hard, rub down with pumice and water. Polish with rotten-stone to a fine lustre, clean up with sweet-oil, and vapour up the oil with a damp alcohol rag. The result is a splendid mirror-like polish. This is the method employed in polishing pianofortes in America.
Rosewood, Coromandel, or Kingwood (a Bright 80Finish).—Apply two thin coats of shellac, sanding between each coat. Then apply three or four thin coats of Zanzibar polishing varnish, allowing enough time for each coat to dry completely. Once it's fully hardened, rub it down with pumice and water. Polish it with rotten-stone until it has a nice shine, clean it up with sweet oil, and finish by wiping the oil with a damp alcohol cloth. The result is a stunning, mirror-like finish. This is the technique used for polishing pianos in America.
Walnut.—For a cheap finish, apply one coat of yellow shellac. When dry, sand-paper down. Apply with brush; rub in well; clean off with rags. This gives a very fair finish.
Walnut.—For an inexpensive finish, apply one coat of yellow shellac. Once it's dry, sand it down. Use a brush to apply it; rub it in thoroughly; wipe off any excess with rags. This gives a pretty decent finish.
For a medium dead finish apply two or three coats of yellow shellac. When dry, rub down with pumice and raw linseed-oil; clean up well; varnish-polish the panels.
For a medium dead finish, apply two or three coats of yellow shellac. When it's dry, rub it down with pumice and raw linseed oil; clean it up well; varnish-polish the panels.
For finish. Before using the above filling, give the work one coat of white shellac. When dry, sand-paper down, and apply the above filling. Give two coats of white shellac; rub down with pumice and raw linseed-oil; clean up well with brown japan and spirits of turpentine, mixed. Wipe off. This is a good imitation of wax-finish; it is waterproof, and will not spot as wax-finish does. The panels are to be varnished-polished. This is to be used with the improved filling No. 2.
For finish. Before using the filling mentioned above, apply one coat of white shellac to the work. Once dry, sand it down and then apply the filling. Apply two coats of white shellac; rub down with pumice and raw linseed oil; clean thoroughly with a mix of brown japan and spirits of turpentine. Wipe off any excess. This method provides a good imitation of wax finish; it is waterproof and won't spot like a wax finish can. The panels should be varnish-polished. This should be used with the improved filling No. 2.
Finishing Cheap Work.—With One Coat of Varnish.—Give the work a coat of boiled linseed-oil; immediately sprinkle dry whiting upon it, and rub it well in with tow all over the surface. The whiting absorbs the oil and completely fills the pores of the wood. For black walnut add a little dry burnt umber. For mahogany or cherry add a little Venetian red, according to the colour of the wood. The application can be made to turned work while in motion in the lathe. Clean off well with rags. The work can then be finished with a single coat of varnish, and for cheap work makes a very good finish.
Finishing Cheap Work.—With One Coat of Varnish.—Apply a coat of boiled linseed oil to the surface; then immediately sprinkle dry whiting on it and rub it in thoroughly with tow all over. The whiting soaks up the oil and fills the wood’s pores completely. For black walnut, mix in a bit of dry burnt umber. For mahogany or cherry, add some Venetian red, depending on the wood’s color. You can apply this while the piece is spinning on the lathe. Wipe it clean with rags afterward. You can then finish it with a single coat of varnish, which provides a great finish for inexpensive work.
For varnishing large surfaces, a two-inch oval varnish brush is to be used first to lay out the varnish, and then a two-inch flat badger flowing-brush for a softener. The latter lays down moats and bubbles left by the large brush. A perfectly smooth glass-like surface is thus obtained. When not in use, these tools should be put into a pot containing raw linseed-oil and spirits of turpentine. This keeps them in a better working condition than if they are kept in varnish, making them clean and soft. Standing in varnish they congeal and become hard as the spirit evaporates from the varnish. For shellacing a large surface use a two-inch bristle brush; for small work, such as 82carvings and mouldings, use a one-and-a-half inch flat brush. These brushes when not in use should be taken from the various pots and deposited in an earthen pot sufficiently large to hold all the shellac brushes used in the shop. Put in enough of raw linseed-oil and thin shellac to cover the bristles of the brushes. Kept in this manner, they will remain clean and elastic, and will wear much longer.
For varnishing large surfaces, start with a two-inch oval varnish brush to apply the varnish, and then use a two-inch flat badger flowing brush to smooth it out. The latter helps to eliminate any moats and bubbles left by the larger brush, resulting in a perfectly smooth, glass-like finish. When not in use, these tools should be stored in a pot with raw linseed oil and spirits of turpentine. This keeps them in better condition than if stored in varnish, keeping them clean and soft. If left in varnish, they harden as the spirits evaporate. For shellacing a large surface, use a two-inch bristle brush; for smaller tasks, such as 82carvings and moldings, use a one-and-a-half inch flat brush. When not in use, these brushes should be taken out of their various pots and placed in a sufficiently large earthen pot that can hold all the shellac brushes used in the shop. Add enough raw linseed oil and thin shellac to cover the bristles of the brushes. When kept this way, they will remain clean and flexible, and will last much longer.
Wax Finishing.—Take ½ gall. of turpentine, 1½ lb. yellow beeswax, 1 lb. white beeswax, ½ lb. white rosin. Pulverise the rosin, and shave the wax into fine shavings. Put the whole into the turpentine, and dissolve it cold. If dissolved by a fire-heat, the vitality of the wax is destroyed. When it is thoroughly dissolved, mix well and apply with a stiff brush. Rub well in, and clean off with rags. When dry, it is ready for shellac or varnish as may be desired.
Wax Finishing.—Take ½ gallon of turpentine, 1½ pounds of yellow beeswax, 1 pound of white beeswax, and ½ pound of white rosin. Grind the rosin into a powder, and shave the wax into fine pieces. Combine everything into the turpentine and let it dissolve at room temperature. If you heat it, you’ll ruin the integrity of the wax. Once it's fully dissolved, mix it well and apply it with a stiff brush. Rub it in thoroughly and wipe off any excess with rags. Once dry, it’s ready for shellac or varnish, depending on your preference.
A Varnish Polish.—Take 10 oz. gum shellac, 1 oz. gum sandarach, 1 drachm Venice turpentine, 1 gall. alcohol. Put the mixture into a jug for a day or two, shaking occasionally. When dissolved it is ready for use. Apply a few coats. Polish by rubbing smooth.
A Varnish Polish.—Take 10 oz. of gum shellac, 1 oz. of gum sandarach, 1 drachm of Venice turpentine, and 1 gallon of alcohol. Place the mixture in a jug for a day or two, shaking it occasionally. Once dissolved, it is ready to use. Apply a few coats and polish by rubbing it smooth.
For the commonest kind of work in black walnut a very cheap polish can be made in the following manner: Take 1 gall. of turpentine, 2 lb. pulverised asphaltum, 1 qt. boiled linseed-oil, 2 oz. Venetian red. Put the mixture in a warm place and shake occasionally. When it is 83dissolved, strain and apply to the wood with a stiff brush. Rub well with cloth when dry. Then take 1 pt. of thin shellac, ½ pt. boiled linseed-oil. Shake it well before using. Apply with cloth, rubbing briskly, and you will have a fine polish.
For the most common type of work with black walnut, you can make a very inexpensive polish like this: Take 1 gallon of turpentine, 2 pounds of crushed asphaltum, 1 quart of boiled linseed oil, and 2 ounces of Venetian red. Put the mixture in a warm spot and shake it occasionally. Once it’s dissolved, strain it and apply it to the wood with a stiff brush. Rub it well with a cloth when it’s dry. Then take 1 pint of thin shellac and ½ pint of boiled linseed oil. Shake it well before using. Apply it with a cloth, rubbing briskly, and you'll achieve a nice polish.
With Copal or Zanzibar Varnish.—As a substitute for filling, the wood may receive one coat of native coal-oil, thinned with benzine-spirits; then apply one coat of shellac, and follow with varnish, as desired. The time is not far distant when manufacturers must and will use varnish for the finishing of all kinds of furniture on account of the high price of shellac. Furniture finished in the last-named method may be rubbed with either water or oil. Water has a tendency to harden varnish, while oil softens it. If water is used there will be a saving of oil and rags. In the other case shellac, when rubbed with oil, should be cleaned with japan. This removes the greasy and cloudy appearance which is left after the rubbing with oil, and the work will have a clean, dry, and brighter appearance than otherwise.
With Copal or Zanzibar Varnish.—As an alternative to filling, the wood can get one coat of natural coal oil, thinned with benzine; then apply one coat of shellac, followed by varnish, as preferred. It won’t be long before manufacturers are required to use varnish to finish all types of furniture due to the high price of shellac. Furniture finished this way can be polished with either water or oil. Water tends to harden varnish, while oil softens it. Using water will save on oil and rags. In the other case, when shellac is rubbed with oil, it should be cleaned with japan. This removes the greasy and cloudy look left after rubbing with oil, leaving the surface clean, dry, and shinier than before.
We suggest another idea for finishing black walnut for a cheap or a medium class of work. In the first place, fill the pores of the wood, and apply one thin coat of shellac to hold the filling in the pores of the wood. Let this stand one day; sand-paper down with fine paper, then with a brush apply a coat of coach japan. Rub well, 84and clean off with rags. Let this stand one day to dry, then, with some sand-paper that has been used before, take off the moats from the japan. Go over the whole surface with a soft rag saturated with japan; wipe and clean off carefully, and the job is finished. This, though a cheap finish, is a good one for this class of work.
We have another idea for finishing black walnut for budget-friendly or mid-range projects. First, fill the wood pores and apply a thin coat of shellac to keep the filling in place. Let it sit for a day; then sand it down with fine sandpaper. After that, use a brush to apply a coat of coach japan. Rub it in well, 84and clean off any excess with rags. Allow it to dry for another day, then use some previously used sandpaper to remove any bumps from the japan. Wipe the entire surface with a soft rag soaked in japan; carefully clean off any residue, and the job is done. Although it's an inexpensive finish, it works well for this type of project.
We give one more method of finishing black walnut, that is, with boiled linseed-oil only, and there is no other way of obtaining a genuine oil-finish. Sand-paper the wood down smoothly; apply a coat of boiled linseed-oil over the whole surface; sand-paper well, and clean up dry with rags; let it stand one day to dry, then apply one more coat of oil; rub well in with rags, but do not use sand-paper on this coat. Apply three, four, or more coats in the same way. When the work has received the last coat of oil and is dry, sand-paper down with old paper. Then clean up with the best coach japan with rags, and let the work stand one day to dry. The panels are to be varnish-polished the same as other wood. The work is then finished, and ready for the warerooms.
We have another way to finish black walnut, which is to use only boiled linseed oil, and this is the only method for achieving a true oil finish. Sand the wood down smoothly; apply a coat of boiled linseed oil over the entire surface; sand well, and wipe dry with rags; let it sit for a day to dry, then apply another coat of oil; rub it in well with rags, but don’t use sandpaper on this coat. Apply three, four, or more coats in the same manner. Once the final coat of oil is dry, sand it down with used paper. Then clean it with the best coach japan using rags, and let it sit for a day to dry. The panels should be varnish-polished just like other wood. The work is then complete and ready for the showroom.
This method takes a longer time than finishing with either varnish or shellac; but the cost is less both for materials and for labour, the workman being able to go over a greater surface in the same time. The work will stand longer, and the method gives a rich and close finish, bringing out 85the figure and rich colour of the wood better than in any other method of finishing. It does not cost so much as shellac finish; it only requires a little more time for drying between the coats of oil. In finishing in varnish or shellac, to get the body or surface for polishing three or four coats are frequently applied, which is liable to produce a dull cloudy appearance. For this reason, and having in view the high and increasing price of stock, it seems to us that this really superior method of finishing in oil must take the place of shellac and varnish-finish in good work.
This method takes longer than using varnish or shellac, but it's cheaper in terms of materials and labor since the worker can cover a larger area in the same amount of time. The finish lasts longer and provides a rich, smooth surface, showcasing the wood's grain and color better than any other finishing technique. It costs less than a shellac finish; it just requires a bit more drying time between oil coats. When using varnish or shellac, getting a polished surface often means applying three or four coats, which can lead to a dull, cloudy look. For these reasons, and considering the rising prices of materials, we believe this truly superior oil finishing method should replace shellac and varnish finishes in high-quality work.
Polishing Varnish.—This is certainly a tedious process, and considered by many a matter of difficulty. The following is the mode of procedure: Put two ounces of powdered tripoli into an earthen pot or basin, with water sufficient to cover it; then, with a piece of fine flannel four times doubled, laid over a piece of cork rubber, proceed to polish your varnish, always wetting it well with the tripoli and water. You will know when the process is complete by wiping a part of the work with a sponge and observing whether there is a fair and even gloss. Clean off with a bit of mutton suet and fine flour. Be careful not to rub the work too hard, or longer than is necessary to make the face perfectly smooth and even. Some workmen polish with rotten-stone, others with putty-powder, and others with common 86whiting and water; but tripoli, we think, will be found to answer best.
Polishing Varnish.—This process can definitely be tedious and is often seen as challenging by many. Here's how to do it: Put two ounces of powdered tripoli into a clay pot or basin, adding enough water to cover it. Then, using a piece of fine flannel folded four times, placed over a piece of cork rubber, start polishing your varnish, always making sure to wet it well with the tripoli and water. You'll know you're done when you wipe a section of the work with a sponge and see a nice, even gloss. Clean off with a bit of mutton fat and fine flour. Be careful not to rub too hard or for too long; just enough to make the surface perfectly smooth and even. Some workers use rotten-stone, others use putty-powder, and some use regular 86whiting and water; but we believe tripoli will give the best results.
An American Polish Reviver.—Take of olive-oil 1 lb., of rectified oil of amber 1 lb., spirits of turpentine 1 lb., oil of lavender 1 oz., tincture of alkanet-root ½ oz. Saturate a piece of cotton batting with this polish, and apply it to the wood; then, with soft and dry cotton rags, rub well and wipe off dry. This will make old furniture in private dwellings, or that which has been shop-worn in warerooms, look as well as when first finished. The articles should be put into a jar or jug, well mixed, and afterwards kept tightly corked.
An American Polish Reviver.—Take 1 lb. of olive oil, 1 lb. of rectified amber oil, 1 lb. of turpentine, 1 oz. of lavender oil, and ½ oz. of alkanet root tincture. Soak a piece of cotton batting in this polish and apply it to the wood; then, using soft, dry cotton rags, rub well and wipe off excess. This will make old furniture in homes, or pieces that have been worn out in showrooms, look as good as new. The ingredients should be combined in a jar or jug and kept tightly corked.
This is a valuable recipe, and is not known, the writer believes, outside of his practice.
This is a valuable recipe, and the writer thinks it's not known outside of his practice.
CHAPTER X.
MISCELLANEOUS RECIPES.
Oil Polish.—One quart of cold-drawn linseed-oil to be simmered (not boiled) for ten minutes, and strained through flannel; then add one-eighth part of spirits of turpentine: to be applied daily with soft linen rags, and rubbed off lightly; each time the oil is applied the surface should be previously washed with cold water, so as to remove any dirt or dust. This method of polishing is particularly useful for dining-table tops; it will in about six weeks produce a polish so durable as to resist boiling water or hot dishes, and be like a mirror for brilliancy.
Oil Polish.—Take one quart of cold-pressed linseed oil and simmer it (don’t boil) for ten minutes, then strain it through a piece of flannel. Next, add one-eighth part of turpentine. Apply it daily using soft linen cloths, and lightly rub it off. Before each application, make sure to wash the surface with cold water to get rid of any dirt or dust. This polishing method is especially great for dining table tops; in about six weeks, it will create a polish so durable that it can withstand boiling water or hot dishes, and it will shine like a mirror.
Wax Polish.—Eight ounces of beeswax, 2 oz. of resin, and ½ oz. of Venetian turpentine, to be melted over a slow fire; the mass, when quite melted, is poured into a sufficiently large stone-ware pot, and while it is still warm 6 oz. of rectified turpentine are stirred in. After the lapse of twenty-four hours the mass will have 88assumed the consistency of soft butter, and is ready for use. A small portion of the polish is taken up with a woollen rag and rubbed over the surface of the work—at first gently, then more strongly. When the polish is uniformly laid on, the surface is once more rubbed lightly and quickly with a fresh clean rag to produce a gloss.
Wax Polish.—Eight ounces of beeswax, 2 oz. of resin, and ½ oz. of Venetian turpentine should be melted over a low flame; once fully melted, pour the mixture into a large stoneware pot, and while it's still warm, stir in 6 oz. of refined turpentine. After twenty-four hours, the mixture will have 88the consistency of soft butter and will be ready to use. Take a small amount of the polish with a wool cloth and apply it to the surface of the item—starting gently, then applying more pressure. Once the polish is evenly applied, lightly and quickly buff the surface with a clean cloth to create a shine.
Waterproof French Polish.—Take 2 oz. gum benjamin, ½ oz. gum sandarach, ½ oz. gum anîme, 1½ oz. gum benzoin, and 1 pt. alcohol. Mix in a closely-stoppered bottle, and put in a warm place till the gums are well dissolved. Then strain off, and add ¼ gill of poppy-oil. Shake well together, and it is ready for use.
Waterproof French Polish.—Take 2 oz. of gum benjamin, ½ oz. of gum sandarach, ½ oz. of gum anime, 1½ oz. of gum benzoin, and 1 pt. of alcohol. Mix in a tightly closed bottle and place it in a warm location until the gums are completely dissolved. Then strain it, and add ¼ gill of poppy oil. Shake well together, and it's ready to use.
A Varnish for Musical Instruments.—Take one gallon of alcohol, 1 lb. gum sandarach, ½ lb. gum mastic, 2 lbs. best white resin, 3 lbs. gum benzoin; cut the gums cold. When they are thoroughly dissolved, strain the mixture through fine muslin, and bottle for use; keep the bottle tightly corked. This is a beautiful varnish for violins and other musical instruments of wood, and for fancy articles, such as those of inlaid work. It is also well adapted for panel-work, and all kinds of cabinet furniture. There is required only one flowing coat, and it produces a very fine mirror-like surface. Apply this varnish 89with a flat camel's-hair or sable brush. In an hour after application the surface is perfectly dry.
A Varnish for Musical Instruments.—Take one gallon of alcohol, 1 lb. gum sandarach, ½ lb. gum mastic, 2 lbs. best white resin, and 3 lbs. gum benzoin; cut the gums cold. Once they are fully dissolved, strain the mixture through fine muslin and bottle it for use; keep the bottle tightly corked. This is an excellent varnish for violins and other wooden musical instruments, as well as for decorative items like inlaid pieces. It's also great for paneling and all types of cabinet furniture. Only one coat is needed, and it creates a beautiful, mirror-like finish. Apply this varnish 89with a flat camel's-hair or sable brush. After an hour of application, the surface will be completely dry.
French Varnish for Cabinet-work.—Take of shellac 1½ oz. gum mastic and gum sandarach, of each ½ oz., spirit of wine by weight 20 oz. The gums to be first dissolved in the spirit, and lastly the shellac. This may be best effected by means of the water-bath. Place a loosely-corked bottle containing the mixture in a vessel of warm water of a temperature below the boiling point, and let it remain until the gums are dissolved. Should evaporation take place, an equal quantity to the spirit of wine so lost must be replaced till the mixture settles, then pour off the clear liquid for use, leaving the impurities behind; but do not filter it. Greater hardness may be given to the varnish by increasing the quantity of shellac, which may be done to the amount of one-twelfth of the lac to eleven-twelfths of spirit. But in this latter proportion the varnish loses its transparency in some degree, and must be laid on in very small quantities at a time.
French Varnish for Cabinet Work.—Take 1.5 oz. of shellac, and 0.5 oz. each of gum mastic and gum sandarach, along with 20 oz. of spirit of wine by weight. First, dissolve the gums in the spirit, and then add the shellac. The best way to do this is using a water bath. Place a loosely corked bottle with the mixture in a warm water bath, making sure the temperature is below boiling, and let it sit until the gums are dissolved. If evaporation occurs, replace the lost spirit of wine in equal amounts until the mixture settles, then pour off the clear liquid for use, leaving the impurities behind; do not filter it. You can increase the hardness of the varnish by adding more shellac, up to one-twelfth of the total amount of lac to eleven-twelfths of spirit. However, in this ratio, the varnish will lose some transparency and should be applied in very small amounts at a time.
Cabinet-maker's Varnish.—Take 5 lbs. very pale gum shellac, 7 oz. gum mastic, 1 gallon alcohol. Dissolve in a cold atmosphere with frequent stirring.
Cabinet-maker's Varnish.—Take 5 lbs. of very pale gum shellac, 7 oz. of gum mastic, and 1 gallon of alcohol. Dissolve in a cool environment while stirring frequently.
Amber Varnish.—This is a most difficult varnish to make. It is usually prepared by roasting the amber and adding hot linseed-oil, after which turpentine can be mixed if required. But for a small quantity, dissolve the broken amber, without heat, in the smallest possible quantity of chloroform or pure benzine. Heat the linseed-oil, remove it from the fire, and pour in the amber solution, stirring all the time. Then add the turpentine. If not quite clear, heat again, using the utmost caution.
Amber Varnish.—This is a very challenging varnish to make. It’s typically prepared by roasting the amber and adding hot linseed oil, after which turpentine can be mixed in if needed. For a small amount, dissolve the broken amber, without heat, in the smallest possible amount of chloroform or pure benzene. Heat the linseed oil, take it off the heat, and pour in the amber solution while stirring continuously. Then add the turpentine. If it’s not completely clear, heat it again very carefully.
Colourless Varnish with Copal.—To prepare this varnish the copal must be picked; each piece is broken, and a drop of rosemary-oil poured on it. Those pieces which, on contact with the oil, become soft are the ones used. The pieces being selected, they are ground and passed through a sieve, being reduced to a fine powder. It is then placed in a glass, and a corresponding volume of rosemary-oil poured over it; the mixture is then stirred for a few minutes until it is transformed into a thick liquor. It is then left to rest for two hours, when a few drops of rectified 91alcohol are added, and intimately mixed. Repeat the operation until the varnish is of a sufficient consistency; leave the rest for a few days, and decant the clear. This varnish can be applied to wood and metals (Journal of Applied Chemistry).
Colorless Varnish with Copal.—To make this varnish, you need to select the copal. Each piece should be broken, and a drop of rosemary oil added to it. The pieces that soften when in contact with the oil are the ones to use. After selecting these pieces, grind them and pass them through a sieve until you have a fine powder. Place the powder in a container and pour a similar amount of rosemary oil over it; stir the mixture for a few minutes until it turns into a thick liquid. Let it sit for two hours, then add a few drops of rectified 91alcohol and mix thoroughly. Repeat this process until the varnish reaches the right consistency; set it aside for a few days, and then pour off the clear liquid. This varnish can be used on wood and metals (Journal of Applied Chemistry).
Seedlac Varnish.—Wash 3 oz. of seedlac in several waters; dry it and powder it coarsely. Dissolve it in one pint of rectified spirits of wine; submit it to gentle heat, shaking it as often as convenient, until it appears dissolved. Pour off the clear part, and strain the remainder.
Seedlac Varnish.—Wash 3 oz. of seedlac in multiple waters; dry it and grind it coarsely. Dissolve it in one pint of purified alcohol; apply gentle heat, shaking it regularly until it looks completely dissolved. Pour off the clear liquid and strain the rest.
Patent Varnish for Wood or Canvas.—Take 1 gallon spirits of turpentine, 2¼ lbs. asphaltum. Put them into an iron kettle on a stove, and dissolve the gum by heat. When it is dissolved and a little cool, add 1 pint copal varnish and 1 pint boiled linseed-oil. When entirely cool it is ready for use. For a perfect black add a little lamp-black.
Patent Varnish for Wood or Canvas.—Take 1 gallon of turpentine, 2¼ lbs. of asphaltum. Put them into a metal pot on the stove and heat until the gum dissolves. Once it's dissolved and a bit cool, add 1 pint of copal varnish and 1 pint of boiled linseed oil. When it's completely cool, it's ready to use. For a deep black, add a little lamp black.
Copal Varnish.—Dissolve the copal, broken in pieces, in linseed-oil, by digestion, the heat being almost sufficient to boil the oil. The oil should be made drying by the addition of quick-lime. This makes a beautiful transparent varnish. It should be diluted with oil of turpentine; a 92very small quantity of copal, in proportion to the oil, will be found sufficient.
Copal Varnish.—Dissolve the copal, broken into pieces, in linseed oil using gentle heat, nearly to the boiling point of the oil. The oil should be made drying by adding quick-lime. This creates a beautiful transparent varnish. It should be thinned with turpentine; a 92very small amount of copal, in relation to the oil, will be enough.
Carriage Varnish.—Take 19 oz. gum sandarach, 9½ oz. orange shellac, 12½ oz. white resin, 18 oz. turpentine, 5 pints alcohol. Dissolve and strain. Use for the internal parts of carriages and similar purposes. This varnish dries in ten minutes.
Carriage Varnish.—Take 19 oz. of gum sandarach, 9½ oz. of orange shellac, 12½ oz. of white resin, 18 oz. of turpentine, and 5 pints of alcohol. Dissolve and strain. Use for the internal parts of carriages and similar uses. This varnish dries in ten minutes.
Transparent Varnish.—Take 1 gallon alcohol, 2 lbs. gum sandarach, ½ 1b. gum mastic. Place them in a tin can. Cork tight and shake frequently, placing the can in a warm place. When dissolved it is ready for use.
Transparent Varnish.—Take 1 gallon of alcohol, 2 lbs. of gum sandarach, and ½ lb. of gum mastic. Put them in a tin can. Seal it tightly and shake it often, keeping the can in a warm place. When fully dissolved, it’s ready to use.
Crystal Varnish for Maps, etc.—Mix together 1 oz. Canada balsam and 2 oz. spirits of turpentine. Before applying this varnish to a drawing or a painting in water-colours the paper should be placed on a stretcher, sized with a thin solution of isinglass in water, and dried. Apply the varnish with a soft camel's-hair brush.
Crystal Varnish for Maps, etc.—Combine 1 oz. of Canada balsam with 2 oz. of turpentine. Before using this varnish on a drawing or a watercolor painting, make sure to stretch the paper and size it with a thin solution of isinglass in water, then let it dry. Use a soft camel's-hair brush to apply the varnish.
A Black Varnish.—Mix a small quantity of gas-black with the brown hard varnish pre93viously mentioned. The black can be obtained by boiling a pot over a gas-burner, so that it almost touches the burner, when a fine jet-black will form at the bottom, which remove and mix with the varnish, and apply with a brush.
A Black Varnish.—Combine a small amount of gas-black with the brown hard varnish mentioned earlier. You can get the black by boiling a pot over a gas burner, placing it close to the flame so that a fine jet-black forms at the bottom. Remove this and mix it with the varnish, then apply it with a brush.
A Black Polish can be made in the same way: after wetting the rubber, just touch it with the black. Place the linen cover over, touch it with oil, and it is ready for work.
A Black Polish can be made the same way: after wetting the rubber, just apply the black to it. Put the linen cover on, apply some oil, and it’s ready to use.
Varnish for Iron.—Take 2 lbs. pulverised gum asphaltum, ¼ lb. gum benzoin, 1 gallon spirits of turpentine. To make this varnish quickly, keep in a warm place, and shake often till it is dissolved. Shade to suit with finely-ground ivory-black. Apply with a brush. This varnish should be used on iron-work exposed to the weather. It is also well adapted for inside work, such as iron furniture, where a handsome polish is desired.
Varnish for Iron.—Take 2 lbs. powdered gum asphaltum, ¼ lb. gum benzoin, and 1 gallon of turpentine. To make this varnish quickly, keep it in a warm place and shake it often until it's dissolved. Adjust the color to your preference with finely-ground ivory black. Apply it with a brush. This varnish should be used on ironwork exposed to the elements. It's also great for indoor projects, like iron furniture, when a nice polish is wanted.
Varnish for Tools.—Take 2 oz. tallow, 1 oz. resin; melt together, and strain while hot to remove the specks which are in the resin. Apply a slight coat on the tools with a brush, and it will keep off the rust for any length of time.
Varnish for Tools.—Take 2 oz. of tallow and 1 oz. of resin; melt them together and strain while hot to get rid of the specks in the resin. Use a brush to apply a thin coat on the tools, and it will prevent rust for a long time.
To Make Labels Adhere to a Polished Surface.—Brush the back of a label over with thin varnish or polish, and press down with a soft rag; this must be done quickly, as the polish soon becomes dry. This is the way labels are put on pianofortes, and also the paper imitation of fancy woods on polished pine-work.
To Make Labels Stick to a Polished Surface.—Apply a thin layer of varnish or polish to the back of a label, then press it down with a soft cloth; you need to do this quickly, as the polish dries fast. This is how labels are affixed to pianos, as well as the paper imitation of decorative woods on polished pine surfaces.
How to Remove French Polish or Varnish from Old Work.—Cleaning off old work for re-polishing or varnishing is usually found difficult, and to occupy much time if only the scraper and glass-paper be used. It can be easily accomplished in a very short time by washing the surface with liquid ammonia, applied with a piece of rag; the polish will peel off like a skin, and leave the wood quite bare. In carvings or turned work, after applying the ammonia, use a hard brush to remove the varnish. Unadulterated spirits of wine used in a tepid state will answer the same purpose.
How to Remove French Polish or Varnish from Old Work.—Cleaning old work for re-polishing or varnishing can be challenging and time-consuming if you only use a scraper and sandpaper. However, it can be done quickly by washing the surface with liquid ammonia on a cloth; the polish will come off easily, leaving the wood completely bare. For carved or turned pieces, after using the ammonia, use a stiff brush to remove the varnish. Pure spirits of wine at a warm temperature will work just as well.
Colouring for Carcase Work.—In the best class of cabinet-work all the inside work—such as carcase backs, shelves, etc.—is made of good materials, such as wainscot, soft mahogany, Havannah cedar, or American walnut; but for second-class work, pine or white deal is used instead, and coloured.
Coloring for Cabinet Work.—In high-quality cabinet-making, all the internal components—like the carcass backs, shelves, and so on—are made from quality materials, such as wainscot, soft mahogany, Havannah cedar, or American walnut; however, for lower-quality work, pine or white deal is used instead, and is painted.
The colouring matter used should match with 95the exterior wood. For mahogany take ½ lb. of ground yellow ochre to a quart of water, and add about a tablespoonful of Venetian red—a very small quantity of red in proportion to the yellow is sufficient for mahogany—and a piece of glue about the size of a walnut; the whole to be well stirred and boiled. Brush over while hot, and immediately rub off with soft shavings or a sponge. For the antique hues of old wainscot mix equal parts of burnt umber and brown ochre. For new oak, bird's-eye maple, birch, satin-wood, or any similar light yellowish woods, whiting or white-lead, tinted with orange chrome, or by yellow ochre and a little size. For walnut, brown umber, glue size, and water; or by burnt umber very moderately modified with yellow ochre. For rosewood, Venetian red tinted with lamp-black. For ebony, ivory-black; but for the common ebonised work lamp-black is generally used.
The color used should match the exterior wood. For mahogany, take ½ lb. of ground yellow ochre to a quart of water, and add about a tablespoon of Venetian red—a very small amount of red compared to the yellow is enough for mahogany—and a piece of glue about the size of a walnut; mix everything well and boil. Brush it on while hot, and then immediately wipe it off with soft shavings or a sponge. For the antique colors of old wainscot, mix equal parts of burnt umber and brown ochre. For new oak, bird's-eye maple, birch, satinwood, or any similar light yellowish woods, use whiting or white lead, tinted with orange chrome, or yellow ochre with a bit of size. For walnut, mix brown umber, glue size, and water, or use burnt umber lightly mixed with yellow ochre. For rosewood, use Venetian red tinted with lamp-black. For ebony, use ivory-black; but for common ebonized work, lamp-black is typically used.
When the colouring is dry, it should be rubbed down with a piece of worn fine glass-paper, and polished with beeswax rubbed on a very hard brush—a worn-out scrubbing-brush is as good as anything—or it can be well rubbed with Dutch rush. In polishing always rub the way of the grain. The cheap work seldom gets more than a coat of colour rubbed off with shavings.
When the paint is dry, it should be sanded down with a piece of fine sandpaper, and polished with beeswax applied with a stiff brush—a worn-out scrubbing brush works just fine—or it can be rubbed thoroughly with Dutch rush. When polishing, always go with the grain. Inexpensive work usually only gets a coat of paint that is wiped down with shavings.
Cheap but Valuable Stain for the Sap of Black Walnut.—Take 1 gallon of strong 96vinegar, 1 lb. dry burnt umber, ½ lb. fine rose-pink, ½ lb. dry burnt Vandyke brown. Put them into a jug and mix them well; let the mixture stand one day, and it will then be ready for use. Apply this stain to the sap with a piece of fine sponge; it will dry in half an hour. The whole piece is then ready for the filling process. When completed, the stained part cannot be detected even by those who have performed the work. This recipe is of value, as by it wood of poor quality and mostly of sap can be used with good effect.
Affordable yet Effective Stain for Black Walnut Sap.—Combine 1 gallon of strong 96vinegar, 1 lb. dry burnt umber, ½ lb. fine rose-pink, and ½ lb. dry burnt Vandyke brown in a jug and mix well. Let the mixture sit for one day before using it. Apply this stain to the sap with a piece of fine sponge; it will dry in half an hour. The entire piece is then ready for the filling process. Once completed, the stained area is unrecognizable, even to those who did the work. This recipe is valuable because it allows for the effective use of lower quality wood and sap.
Polish for Removing Stains, etc., from Furniture (American).—Take ½ pint alcohol, ¼ oz. pulverised resin, ¼ oz. gum shellac, ½ pint boiled linseed-oil. Shake the mixture well, and apply it with a sponge, brush, or cotton flannel, rubbing well after the application.
Polish for Removing Stains, etc., from Furniture (American).—Take ½ pint of alcohol, ¼ oz. of powdered resin, ¼ oz. of gum shellac, and ½ pint of boiled linseed oil. Shake the mixture well, and apply it with a sponge, brush, or cotton cloth, rubbing it in thoroughly after application.
Walnut Stain to be used on Pine and White-wood.—Take 1 gallon of very thin sized shellac; add 1 lb. of dry burnt umber, 1 lb. of dry burnt sienna, and ¼ lb. of lamp-black. Put these articles into a jug, and shake frequently until they are mixed. Apply one coat with a brush. When the work is dry, sand-paper down with fine paper, and apply one coat of shellac or cheap varnish. It will then be a good imitation 97of solid walnut, and will be adapted for the back-boards of mirror-frames, for the backside and inside of case-work, and for similar work.
Walnut Stain for Pine and White Wood.—Take 1 gallon of very thin shellac; add 1 lb. of dry burnt umber, 1 lb. of dry burnt sienna, and ¼ lb. of lamp-black. Put these materials into a jug and shake frequently until mixed. Apply one coat with a brush. After it dries, sand it down with fine sandpaper and apply one coat of shellac or a cheap varnish. It will then look like solid walnut and will be suitable for the backs of mirror frames, the back and inside of casework, and similar projects. 97
Rosewood Stain.—Take 1 lb. of logwood chips, ½ lb. of red-sanders, ½ gallon of water. Boil over a fire until the full strength is obtained. Apply the mixture, while hot, to the wood with a brush. Use one or two coats to obtain a strong red colour. Then take 1 gallon of spirits of turpentine and 2 lb. of asphaltum. Dissolve in an iron kettle on a stove, stirring constantly. Apply with a brush over the red stain, to imitate rosewood. To make a perfect black, add a little lamp-black. The addition of a small quantity of varnish with the turpentine will improve it. This stain applied to birchwood gives as good an imitation of rosewood as on black walnut, the shade on the birch being a little brighter.
Rosewood Stain.—Take 1 lb. of logwood chips, ½ lb. of red-sanders, and ½ gallon of water. Boil over a fire until you achieve full strength. While it's still hot, apply the mixture to the wood with a brush. Use one or two coats to get a strong red color. Then take 1 gallon of turpentine and 2 lb. of asphaltum. Dissolve them in an iron kettle on the stove, stirring constantly. Brush this over the red stain to mimic rosewood. To create a perfect black, add a bit of lamp-black. Adding a small amount of varnish with the turpentine will enhance it. This stain applied to birchwood gives a great imitation of rosewood, though the shade on birch is a little brighter than on black walnut.
Rosewood Stain for Cane Work, etc.—Take 1 gallon alcohol, 1 lb. red-sanders, 1 lb. dragon's blood, 1 lb. extract logwood, ½ lb. gum shellac. Put the mixture into a jug, and steep well till it obtains its full strength. Then strain, and it will be ready for use. Apply with brush, giving one, two, or more coats, according to the depth of colour desired. Then give one or more coats of varnish. This stain is suitable for use 98on cane, willow, or reed work, and produces a good imitation of rosewood.
Rosewood Stain for Cane Work, etc.—Combine 1 gallon of alcohol, 1 lb. of red sanders, 1 lb. of dragon's blood, 1 lb. of logwood extract, and ½ lb. of gum shellac. Place the mixture in a jug and let it steep until it reaches full strength. Then strain it, and it will be ready to use. Apply with a brush, using one, two, or more coats depending on how deep you want the color to be. After that, add one or more coats of varnish. This stain works well on cane, willow, or reed materials and gives a good imitation of rosewood.
French Polish Reviver.—This recipe will be found a valuable one. If the work is sweated and dirty, make it tolerably wet, and let it stand a few minutes; then rub off and polish with a soft rag. It is important that the ingredients should be mixed in a bottle in the order as given: Vinegar, 1 gill; methylated spirit, 1 gill; linseed-oil, ½ pint; butter of antimony (poison), 1 oz. Raw linseed-oil, moderately thinned with turpentine or spirits of wine, will also make a good reviver. Old furniture, or furniture that has been warehoused for a long time, should be washed with soda and warm water previous to applying the reviver.
French Polish Reviver.—This recipe is really useful. If the surface is dirty or grimy, dampen it a bit and let it sit for a few minutes; then wipe it off and polish it with a soft cloth. It's essential to mix the ingredients in a bottle in the exact order given: Vinegar, 1 gill; methylated spirit, 1 gill; linseed oil, ½ pint; butter of antimony (toxic), 1 oz. Raw linseed oil, thinned out slightly with turpentine or spirits of wine, can also work well as a reviver. Old furniture or furniture that's been stored for a long time should be washed with soda and warm water before applying the reviver.
Morocco Leather Reviver.—The coverings of chairs or sofas in morocco, roan, or skiver can be much improved by this reviver. If old and greasy, wash with sour milk first. The reviver should be applied with a piece of wadding, and wiped one way only, as in glazing. The colour can be matched by adding red-sanders. Methylated spirit, ½ pint; gum benzoin, 2 oz.; shellac, ½ oz. Mix, and shake up occasionally until dissolved.99
Morocco Leather Reviver.—The upholstery of chairs or sofas made from morocco, roan, or skiver can be greatly enhanced with this reviver. If the leather is old and greasy, start by washing it with sour milk. Apply the reviver using a piece of wadding, and wipe in one direction only, similar to glazing. You can match the color by adding red-sanders. Combine ½ pint of methylated spirit, 2 oz. of gum benzoin, and ½ oz. of shellac. Mix them together and shake occasionally until dissolved.99
Hair-cloth Reviver.—Mix equal parts of marrow-oil (neats-foot), ox-gall. and ivory-black, to be well rubbed with a cloth. This composition forms a valuable renovator for old hair-cloth.
Hair-cloth Reviver.—Mix equal parts of marrow oil (neats-foot), ox gall, and ivory black, and rub it well with a cloth. This mixture is a great way to restore old hair-cloth.
To Remove Grease Stains from Silks, Damasks, Cloth, etc.—Pour over the stain a small quantity of benzoline spirit, and it will soon disappear without leaving the least mark behind. The most delicate colours can be so treated without fear of injury. For paint stains chloroform is very efficacious.
How to Remove Grease Stains from Silks, Damasks, Fabrics, etc.—Pour a small amount of benzine over the stain, and it will quickly vanish without leaving any marks. Even the most delicate colors can be treated this way without risk of damage. For paint stains, chloroform works very well.
To Remove Ink Stains from White Marble.—Make a little chloride of lime into a paste with water, and rub it into the stains, and let it remain a few hours; then wash off with soap and water.
To Remove Ink Stains from White Marble.—Make a paste with chlorine bleach and water, rub it into the stains, and let it sit for a few hours; then wash it off with soap and water.
CHAPTER XI.
MATERIALS USED.
Alkanet-root (botanical name, Anchusa tinctoria).—This plant is a native of the Levant, but it is much cultivated in the south of France and in Germany. The root is the only part used by French polishers to obtain a rich quiet red; the colouring is chiefly contained in the bark or outer covering, and is easily obtained by soaking the root in spirits or linseed-oil. The plant itself is a small herbaceous perennial, and grows to about a foot in height, with lance-shaped leaves and purple flowers, and with a long woody root with a deep red bark.
Alkanet-root (botanical name, Anchusa tinctoria).—This plant originates from the Levant but is widely grown in the south of France and in Germany. French polishers use only the root to create a deep, subtle red color; the dye is primarily found in the bark or outer layer, and it's easily extracted by soaking the root in spirits or linseed oil. The plant is a small herbaceous perennial, reaching about a foot tall, with lance-shaped leaves and purple flowers, along with a long, woody root covered in deep red bark.
Madder-root (Rubia tinctoria).—This plant is indigenous to the Levant; but it is much cultivated in Southern Europe, and also in India. Its uses are for dyeing and staining; it can be procured in a powdered state, and imparts its red colour when soaked in water or spirits. This is a creeping plant with a slender stem; almost 101quadrangular, the leaves grow four in a bunch; flowers small, fruit yellow, berry double, one being abortive. The roots are dug up when the plant has attained the age of two or three years; they are of a long cylindrical shape, about the thickness of a quill, and of a red-brownish colour, and when powdered are a bright Turkish-red. Extracts of madder are mostly obtained by treating the root with boiling water, collecting the precipitates which separate on cooling, mixing them with gum or starch, and adding acetate of alumina or iron. This is in fact a mixture of colouring matter and a mordant.
Madder-root (Rubia tinctoria).—This plant is native to the Levant but is widely grown in Southern Europe and India. It's used for dyeing and staining; it can be found in powdered form and releases its red color when soaked in water or alcohol. This is a creeping plant with a slender, almost 101quadrangular stem. The leaves grow in groups of four; it has small flowers, and the fruit is yellow, with a double berry—one being non-functional. The roots are harvested when the plant is two to three years old; they have a long, cylindrical shape, about the size of a quill, and are reddish-brown. When powdered, they turn a bright Turkish-red. Extracts of madder are typically made by boiling the root in water, collecting the precipitates that form as it cools, mixing them with gum or starch, and adding aluminum or iron acetate. This is essentially a blend of coloring agents and a mordant.
Red-sanders (Pterocarpus santalinus).—The tree from which this wood is obtained is a lofty one, and is to be found in many parts of India, especially about Madras. It yields a dye of a bright garnet-red colour, and is used by French polishers for dyeing polishes, varnishes, revivers, etc.
Red-sanders (Pterocarpus santalinus).—The tree that produces this wood is quite tall and can be found in various regions of India, particularly around Madras. It produces a vibrant garnet-red dye, which is used by French polishers for coloring polishes, varnishes, revivers, and more.
Logwood (Hæmatoxylon campeachianum).—This is a moderate-sized tree with a very contorted trunk and branches, which are beset with sharp thorns, and blooms with a yellow flower. It is a native of Central America and the West Indies. This valuable dye-wood is imported in logs; the heart-wood is the most valuable, which 102is cut up into chips or ground to powder for the use of dyers by large powerful mills constructed especially for the purpose. Logwood, when boiled in water, easily imparts its red colour. If a few drops of acetic acid (vinegar) is added, a bright red is produced; and when a little alum is added for a mordant, it forms red ink. If an alkali, such as soda or potash, is used instead of an acid, the colour changes to a dark blue or purple, and with a little management every shade of these colours can be obtained. Logwood put into polish or varnish also imparts its red colour.
Logwood (Hæmatoxylon campeachianum).—This is a medium-sized tree with a twisted trunk and branches covered in sharp thorns, and it blooms with yellow flowers. It’s native to Central America and the West Indies. This valuable dye wood is imported in logs; the heartwood is the most prized part, which 102is chopped into chips or ground into powder for dyers, using large mills specifically made for this. When boiled in water, logwood easily releases its red color. Adding a few drops of acetic acid (vinegar) produces a bright red; and when some alum is added as a mordant, it creates red ink. If an alkali, like soda or potash, is used instead of an acid, the color shifts to a dark blue or purple, and with a little care, you can achieve every shade within these colors. Logwood also gives its red color to polish or varnish.
Fustic (Maclura tinctoria).—This tree is a native of the West Indies, and imparts a yellow dye. Great quantities are used for dyeing linens, etc. The fustic is a large and handsome evergreen, and is imported in long sticks.
Fustic (Maclura tinctoria).—This tree is native to the West Indies and produces a yellow dye. Large amounts are used for dyeing linens and other fabrics. The fustic is a large and attractive evergreen, and it is imported in long sticks.
Turmeric (Curcuma longa).—Turmeric is a stemless plant, with palmated tuberous roots and smooth lance-shaped leaves. It is imported from the East Indies and China. The root is the part which affords the yellow powder for dyeing. It is also a condiment, and is largely used in Indian curry-powder. Paper stained with turmeric is used by chemists as a test for alkalies, and it is also used in making Dutch, pink, and gold-coloured varnishes.103
Turmeric (Curcuma longa).—Turmeric is a stemless plant with tuberous roots and smooth, lance-shaped leaves. It is imported from the East Indies and China. The root is the source of the yellow powder used for dyeing. It is also a spice and is commonly found in Indian curry powder. Chemists use turmeric-stained paper to test for alkalis, and it is also used in making Dutch, pink, and gold-colored varnishes.103
Indigo (Indigofera tinctoria).—Indigo is a shrub which grows from two to three feet in height, and is cut down just as it begins to flower. It is cultivated in almost all the countries situated in the tropics. The dye substance is prepared from the stems and leaves, and is largely used in calico-printing.
Indigo (Indigofera tinctoria).—Indigo is a shrub that grows two to three feet tall and is cut down right as it starts to bloom. It’s grown in nearly all tropical countries. The dye is made from the stems and leaves and is widely used in calico printing.
Persian Berries (Rhamnus infectorius).—These berries are the produce of a shrub of a species of buckthorn common in Persia, whence they derive their name; but large quantities are also imported into England from Turkey and the south of France. The berries are gathered in an unripe state, and furnish a yellow dye.
Persian Berries (Rhamnus infectorius).—These berries come from a type of buckthorn shrub found commonly in Persia, which is how they got their name; however, significant amounts are also imported into England from Turkey and the south of France. The berries are picked while still unripe and are used to create a yellow dye.
Nut-galls.—These are found upon the young twigs of the Turkish dwarf oak (Quercus infectoria), and are produced by the puncture of an insect called Cynips. The supply is principally from Turkey and Aleppo. Nut-galls contain a large quantity of tannin and gallic acid, and are extensively used in dyeing.
Nut-galls.—These are found on the young branches of the Turkish dwarf oak (Quercus infectoria), produced by the puncture of an insect called Cynips. The main sources are Turkey and Aleppo. Nut-galls contain a high amount of tannin and gallic acid, and are widely used in dyeing.
Catechu.—This is obtained from the East Indies, and is the extract of the Acacia catechu, a thorny tree. The wood is cut up into chips similar to logwood, and after boiling and evapora104tion the liquor assumes the consistency of tar; but when cold it hardens, and is formed into small squares. It is extensively used by tanners in place of oak bark.
Catechu.—This is sourced from the East Indies and is the extract of the Acacia catechu, a thorny tree. The wood is cut into chips resembling logwood, and after boiling and evaporation, the liquid becomes thick like tar; but when cooled, it hardens and is made into small squares. It’s widely used by tanners instead of oak bark.
Thus.—Thus is the resin which exudes from the spruce-fir, and is used by some polishers in the making of polishes and varnishes.
Thus.—Thus is the resin that flows from the spruce-fir, and is used by some polishers to create polishes and varnishes.
Sandarach is the produce of the Thuya articulata of Barbary. It occurs in small pale yellow scales, slightly acid, and is soluble in alcohol; it is used in both polishes and varnishes.
Sandarach comes from the Thuya articulata tree found in Barbary. It appears as small, pale yellow flakes that have a slightly acidic taste and dissolve in alcohol. It's used in both polishes and varnishes.
Mastic exudes from the mastic-tree (Pistacia lentiscus), and is principally obtained from Chios, in the Grecian Archipelago. It runs freely when an incision is made in the body of the tree, but not otherwise. It occurs in the form of nearly colourless and transparent tears of a faint smell, and is soluble in alcohol as well as oil of turpentine, forming a rapidly-drying but alterable varnish, which becomes brittle and dark-coloured by age.
Mastic comes from the mastic tree (Pistacia lentiscus) and is mainly sourced from Chios in the Greek Archipelago. It flows easily when the tree's bark is cut, but not at other times. It appears as almost colorless, transparent droplets with a light fragrance and dissolves in both alcohol and turpentine oil, creating a quick-drying but changeable varnish that becomes brittle and darkens with age.
Copal is one of the most valuable of gums, and is furnished by many countries in the districts of Africa explored by Mr. H. M. Stanley, the discoverer of Livingstone. Copal is found in a fossil state in very large quantities. The natives collect the gum by searching in the sandy soil, mostly in the hilly districts, the country being almost barren, with no large tree except the Adansonia, and occasionally a few thorny bushes.
Copal is one of the most valuable types of gum and is sourced from several regions in Africa that were explored by Mr. H. M. Stanley, the man who discovered Livingstone. Copal is present in fossil form in very large amounts. The locals gather the gum by searching through the sandy soil, mainly in the hilly areas, as the land is mostly barren with no large trees aside from the Adansonia and occasionally a few thorny bushes.
The gum is dug out of the earth by the copal gatherers at various depths, from two or three to ten or more feet, in a manner resembling gold-digging; and great excitement appears when a good amount is discovered. The gum is found in various shapes and sizes, resembling a hen's egg, a flat cake, a child's head, etc. There are three kinds, yellow, red, and whitish; and the first furnishes the best varnish and fetches the highest price from the dealers. Many of the natives assert that the copal still grows on different trees, and that it acquires its excellent qualities as a resin by dropping off and sinking several feet into the soil, whereby it is cleansed, and obtains, after a lapse of many years, its hardness, inflammability, and transparency.106
The gum is dug out of the ground by the copal gatherers at various depths, ranging from two or three to ten or more feet, similar to gold mining; and there's a lot of excitement when a good amount is found. The gum comes in various shapes and sizes, resembling a hen's egg, a flat cake, a child's head, and so on. There are three types: yellow, red, and whitish; with the yellow type being the best for varnish and selling for the highest price to dealers. Many locals claim that copal still grows on different trees, and that it gains its excellent qualities as a resin after it falls and sinks several feet into the soil, where it gets cleaned and, after many years, becomes hard, flammable, and transparent.106
Dragon's Blood is the juice of certain tropical plants of a red colour, especially of the tree Pterocarpus draco. After the juice is extracted, it is reduced to a powder by evaporation. It is used for darkening mahogany, colouring varnishes or polishes, etc., and for staining marble. Chemists also use it in preparing tinctures and tooth powders.
Dragon's Blood is the sap from certain tropical plants that is red in color, particularly from the tree Pterocarpus draco. Once the sap is collected, it’s dried and turned into a powder. It’s used to darken mahogany, color varnishes or polishes, and stain marble. Chemists also use it to make tinctures and tooth powders.
Shellac—or, more properly, gum-lac—is a resinous substance obtained from the Bihar-tree, and also from the Ficus Indica, or Banyan-tree. It exudes when the branches are pierced by an insect called the Coccus ficus. The twigs encrusted with the resin in its natural state is called Stick-lac. When the resin is broken off the twigs, powdered, and rubbed with water, a good deal of the red colouring matter is dissolved, and the granular resin left is called seed-lac; and when melted, strained, and spread into thin plates it is called shellac, and is prepared in various ways and known by the names of button, garnet, liver, orange, ruby, thread, etc., and is used for many purposes in the arts. Shellac forms the principal ingredient for polishes and spirit varnishes. Red sealing-wax is composed of shellac, Venice turpentine, and vermilion red; for the black sealing-wax ivory-black is used instead of the vermilion. Shellac is soluble in alcohol, and in many acids and alkalies. Lac-dye is the red 107colour from the stick-lac dissolved by water and evaporated to dryness. The dye, however, is principally from the shrivelled-up body of the insect of the Stick-lac.
Shellac—or more accurately, gum-lac—is a resinous substance derived from the Bihar tree and also from the Ficus Indica, or Banyan tree. It seeps out when the branches are punctured by an insect called the Coccus ficus. The twigs covered with the resin in its natural form are called Stick-lac. When the resin is removed from the twigs, powdered, and mixed with water, a significant amount of the red dye is dissolved, leaving behind a granular resin known as seed-lac. When melted, filtered, and shaped into thin sheets, it is called shellac. It can be prepared in various ways and goes by names like button, garnet, liver, orange, ruby, thread, etc., and is used for many applications in the arts. Shellac is the main ingredient in polishes and spirit varnishes. Red sealing wax is made from shellac, Venice turpentine, and vermilion red; for black sealing wax, ivory black is used instead of vermilion. Shellac dissolves in alcohol and in many acids and bases. Lac dye is the red color obtained from the stick-lac dissolved in water and evaporated to dryness. However, the dye primarily comes from the dried body of the insect found in the Stick-lac.
Shellac is produced in the largest quantity and the best quality in Bengal, Assam, and Burmah. The chief seat of manufacture is Calcutta, where the native manufacturers are accused of adulterating it with resin to a considerable extent. The best customers are Great Britain and the United States, though the demand in the Italian markets appears to be on the increase.
Shellac is made in the highest quantity and quality in Bengal, Assam, and Burma. The main production center is in Calcutta, where local manufacturers are suspected of mixing it with resin significantly. The top buyers are Great Britain and the United States, although demand in the Italian markets seems to be growing.
Amber is a yellow, semi-transparent, fossil resin; hard but brittle, and easily cut with a knife; tasteless, and without smell, except when pounded or heated, and then it emits a fragrant odour. It has considerable lustre; becomes highly electric by friction; and will burn with a yellow flame. It is found in nodules of various sizes in alluvial soils, or on the seashore in many places, particularly on the shores of the Baltic. Amber is much employed for ornamental purposes, and is also used in the manufacture of amber-varnish. It will not dissolve in alcohol, but yields to the concentrated action of sulphuric acid, which will dissolve all resins except caramba wax.
Amber is a yellow, semi-transparent fossilized resin; it's hard but brittle and can be easily cut with a knife. It has no taste or smell unless it's pounded or heated, which makes it give off a pleasant scent. It has a significant shine; becomes highly charged with electricity when rubbed; and burns with a yellow flame. Amber is found in nodules of different sizes in river soils or along coastlines in many places, especially on the shores of the Baltic. It's widely used for decorative purposes and in making amber varnish. It doesn’t dissolve in alcohol, but it does break down under concentrated sulfuric acid, which can dissolve all resins except for caramba wax.
Pumice-stone.—This well-known light and 108spongy volcanic substance is extensively quarried in the small islands that lie off the coast of Sicily. Its porosity and smooth-cutting properties render it of great value to painters and polishers for levelling down first coatings. Ground pumice-stone is the best for cutting down bodies of polish or varnish that are more advanced towards completion. The best way to get a surface to a piece of lump pumice-stone is to rub it down on a flat York stone, or, better still, an old tile that has been well baked. Pumice-stone should not be allowed to stand in water; it causes the grain to contract and to harden, thereby deteriorating its cutting properties.
Pumice stone.—This well-known light and 108spongy volcanic material is widely mined on the small islands off the coast of Sicily. Its porous nature and smooth-cutting qualities make it extremely useful for painters and polishers when leveling first coats. Ground pumice stone is the best for sanding down surfaces that are closer to being finished. The best way to prepare a surface on a piece of lump pumice stone is to rub it on a flat York stone, or even better, an old tile that has been well-fired. Pumice stone should not be left in water; it causes the grain to shrink and harden, which reduces its cutting effectiveness.
Linseed-oil.—This valuable oil is obtained by pressure from the seed of the flax plant (Linum usitatissimum). Linseed contains on an average about 33 per cent. of oil, though the amount varies materially, the percentage obtained fluctuating considerably, not being alike on any two successive days. This is partly due to the varying richness of the seed, and partly to the manner in which it is manipulated in extracting the oil, it being a very easy matter to lose a considerable percentage of the oil by a lack of skill in any of the processes, though they all seem so simple.
Linseed oil.—This valuable oil is extracted by pressing the seeds of the flax plant (Linum usitatissimum). Linseed typically contains about 33 percent oil, though this amount can vary significantly; the percentage obtained can change quite a bit from day to day. This variability is partly due to the differing quality of the seeds and partly due to the techniques used in the oil extraction process. Even though the processes seem straightforward, it's quite easy to lose a significant amount of oil if not done skillfully.
The first thing done with the seed from which the oil is to be extracted is to pass it through a 109screen, to cleanse it from foreign substances. The seed is received in bags containing from three to four bushels, and pockets containing one-sixth of that amount. Having been screened it is passed through a mill, whose large iron-rollers, three in number, grind it to a coarse meal. Thence it is carried to what are known as the "mullers," which are two large stones, about eight feet in diameter and eighteen inches thick, weighing six tons each, standing on their edges, and rolling around on a stone bed. About five bushels of the meal are placed in the mullers, and about eight quarts of hot water are added. The meal is afterwards carried by machinery to the heaters, iron pans holding about a bushel each. These are heated to an even temperature by steam, and are partly filled with the meal, which for seven minutes is submitted to the heat, being carefully stirred in order that all parts may become evenly heated. At the end of that time the meal is placed in bags, which in turn are placed in hydraulic presses, iron plates being placed between the bags. Pressure is applied for about eight minutes, until, as is supposed, all the oil is pressed out, leaving a hard cake, known to the trade as oil-cake, or linseed-cake.
The first step in extracting oil from the seed is to run it through a 109screen to remove any foreign substances. The seeds come in bags that hold three to four bushels, as well as smaller pockets holding one-sixth of that amount. After screening, the seeds go through a mill with three large iron rollers that grind them into a coarse meal. Next, the meal is moved to the "mullers," which are two large stones, around eight feet in diameter and eighteen inches thick, each weighing six tons. These stones are set on their edges and roll around on a stone bed. About five bushels of meal are placed in the mullers, along with eight quarts of hot water. The meal is then transported by machinery to heaters, which are iron pans that hold about a bushel each. These pans are heated evenly by steam, and they are partly filled with the meal, which is stirred carefully for seven minutes to ensure consistent heating. After that time, the meal is put into bags, which are placed in hydraulic presses with iron plates between them. Pressure is applied for about eight minutes until it's believed that all the oil has been extracted, leaving behind a solid cake known in the industry as oil-cake or linseed-cake.
The product of these various processes is known as "raw" oil, a considerable portion of which is sold without further labour being expended upon it. There is, however, a demand for "boiled" oil, for certain purposes where greater drying pro110perties are needed. To supply this want oil is placed in large kettles, holding from five hundred to one thousand gallons, where it is heated to a temperature of about 500 degrees, being stirred continually. This process, when large kettles are used, requires nearly the entire day. While the boiling process is going on, oxide of manganese is added, which helps to give the boiled oil better drying properties. A considerable portion of the oil is bleached, for the use of manufacturers of white paints.
The result of these different processes is called "raw" oil, a large amount of which is sold without any further processing. However, there's a demand for "boiled" oil for specific purposes that require better drying properties. To meet this need, oil is placed in large kettles that hold between five hundred and one thousand gallons, where it's heated to about 500 degrees and stirred continuously. This boiling process, especially in large kettles, takes almost the whole day. During the boiling, manganese oxide is added, which helps improve the drying properties of the boiled oil. A significant portion of the oil is bleached for manufacturers of white paints.
Venice Turpentine.—This is obtained from the larch, and is said to be contained in peculiar sacs in the upper part of the stem, and to be obtained by puncturing them. It is a ropy liquid, colourless or brownish green, having a somewhat unpleasant odour and bitter taste.
Venice Turpentine.—This is obtained from the larch tree and is said to be found in special sacs in the upper part of the trunk, which are punctured to collect it. It is a sticky liquid, colorless or brownish-green, with a somewhat unpleasant smell and a bitter taste.
Oil of Turpentine is the most plentiful and useful of oils. It is obtained in America from a species of pine very plentiful in the Carolinas, Georgia, and Alabama, known as the long-leaved pine (pinus Australis), and found only where the original forest has not been removed.
Oil of Turpentine is the most abundant and useful of oils. It comes from a type of pine that is very common in the Carolinas, Georgia, and Alabama, known as the long-leaved pine (pinus Australis), and is found only in areas where the original forest has not been cleared.
Methylated Spirits.—The methylated spirit of commerce usually consists of the ordinary mixed grain, or "plain" spirit, as produced by the large distillers in London and elsewhere, with 111which are blended, by simply mixing in various proportions, one part vegetable naphtha and three parts spirits of wine. The mixing takes place in presence of a revenue officer, and the spirits so "methylated" are allowed to be used duty free. The revenue authorities consider the admixture of naphtha, having so pungent and disagreeable a smell, a sufficient security against its sale and consumption as a beverage. No process has yet been discovered of getting rid of this odour. It is illegal for druggists to use it in the preparation of medicinal tinctures, unless they are for external use.
Methylated Spirits.—The methylated spirit used in commerce typically consists of regular mixed grain or "plain" spirit, produced by major distillers in London and other locations, along with 111 which are blended by simply combining one part vegetable naphtha with three parts spirits of wine. This mixing is done in the presence of a revenue officer, and the spirits that are "methylated" can be used duty-free. The revenue authorities view the addition of naphtha, which has a strong and unpleasant smell, as a good enough reason to prevent it from being sold and consumed as a beverage. No method has been found to eliminate this odor. It is illegal for pharmacists to use methylated spirits in medicinal tinctures unless they are intended for external use.
PRINTED BY WILLIAM CLOWES AND SONS, LIMITED, LONDON AND BECCLES.
PRINTED BY WILLIAM CLOWES AND SONS, LIMITED, LONDON AND BECCLES.
Crosby Lockwood & Son's
LIST OF WORKS
ON
TRADES AND MANUFACTURES, THE INDUSTRIAL ARTS, CHEMICAL MANUFACTURES, COUNTING HOUSE WORK, Etc..
A Complete Catalogue of NEW and STANDARD BOOKS relating to CIVIL, MECHANICAL, MARINE and ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING; MINING, METALLURGY, and COLLIERY WORKING; ARCHITECTURE and BUILDING; AGRICULTURE and ESTATE MANAGEMENT, etc. Post Free on Application.
A Complete Catalogue of NEW and STANDARD BOOKS related to CIVIL, MECHANICAL, MARINE, and ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING; MINING, METALLURGY, and COLLIERY WORKING; ARCHITECTURE and BUILDING; AGRICULTURE and ESTATE MANAGEMENT, etc. Free shipping upon request.
7, Stationers' Hall Court, London, EC,
AND
121a Victoria St, Westminster, SW
1910.
LIST OF WORKS
ON
TRADES and MANUFACTURES,
THE INDUSTRIAL ARTS, Etc.
ACETYLENE, LIGHTING BY. Generators, Burners, and Electric Furnaces. By William E. Gibbs, M.E. With 66 Illustrations. Crown 8vo, cloth 7/6
ACETYLENE, LIGHTING BY. Generators, Burners, and Electric Furnaces. By William E. Gibbs, M.E. With 66 Illustrations. Crown 8vo, cloth 7/6
AIR GAS LIGHTING SYSTEMS. See Petrol Gas.
AIR GAS LIGHTING SYSTEMS. See Petrol Gas.
ALCOHOL (INDUSTRIAL): ITS MANUFACTURE AND USES. A Practical Treatise based on Dr. Max Maercker's "Introduction to Distillation," as revised by Drs. Delbruck and Lange. By J. K. Brachvogel. 500 pages, 105 engravings Net 16/6
ALCOHOL (INDUSTRIAL): ITS MANUFACTURE AND USES. A Practical Guide based on Dr. Max Maercker's "Introduction to Distillation," revised by Drs. Delbruck and Lange. By J. K. Brachvogel. 500 pages, 105 illustrations Net 16/6
The Industrial Value of Tax-Free Alcohol and what it means to Agricultural Interests — Summary of the Processes in Spirit Manufacture — Starch, How Formed, its Characteristics, and the Changes it Undergoes — Enzymes or Ferments — Products of Fermentation — Starchy and Sacchariferous Raw Materials — Preparation of the Malt — Steaming the Raw Material — The Mashing Process — Fermenting the Mash — Preparation of Artificial Yeast in the Distillery — Fermentation in Practice — Distillation and Rectification — Arrangement of the Distillery — The Spent Wash — Denaturing of Alcohol — Alcohol for the Production of Power, Heating and Illumination — Statistics.
The Industrial Value of Tax-Free Alcohol and Its Importance for Agriculture — Overview of Spirit Production Processes — Starch: Its Formation, Characteristics, and Transformation — Enzymes or Ferments — Outcomes of Fermentation — Starchy and Sugary Raw Materials — Malt Preparation — Steaming Raw Materials — The Mashing Process — Fermenting the Mash — Producing Artificial Yeast in the Distillery — Practical Fermentation — Distillation and Refining — Distillery Layout — The Spent Wash — Alcohol Denaturation — Alcohol for Power Generation, Heating, and Lighting — Statistics.
ALKALI TRADE MANUAL. Including the Manufacture of Sulphuric Acid, Sulphate of Soda, and Bleaching Powder. By John Lomas, Alkali Manufacturer. With 232 Illustrations. Super-royal 8vo, cloth. £1 10s.
ALKALI TRADE MANUAL. Covering the Production of Sulphuric Acid, Sodium Sulfate, and Bleaching Powder. By John Lomas, Alkali Manufacturer. With 232 Illustrations. Super-royal 8vo, cloth. £1.50.
BLOWPIPE IN CHEMISTRY, MINERALOGY, Etc. Containing all known Methods of Anhydrous Analysis, many Working Examples, and Instructions for Making Apparatus. By Lieut.-Colonel W. A. Ross, R.A., F.G.S. Second Edition. Crown 8vo, cloth 5/0
BLOWPIPE IN CHEMISTRY, MINERALOGY, Etc. Featuring all recognized methods of anhydrous analysis, numerous practical examples, and guidelines for creating apparatus. By Lieut.-Colonel W.A. Ross, R.A., F.G.S. Second Edition. Crown 8vo, cloth 5/0
BOOT AND SHOE MAKING, including Measurement, Last-fitting, Cutting-out, Closing and Making, with a Description of the most Approved Machinery employed. By J. B. Leno. Crown 8vo, cloth 2/0
BOOT AND SHOE MAKING, covering Measurement, Last fitting, Cutting out, Closing, and Assembling, along with a Description of the latest Machinery used. By J. B. Leno. Crown 8vo, cloth 2/0
BRASS FOUNDER'S MANUAL. Modelling, Pattern Making, Moulding, Turning, &c. By W. Graham. Crown 8vo, cloth 2/0
BRASS FOUNDER'S MANUAL. Modeling, Pattern Making, Molding, Turning, etc. By W. Graham. Crown 8vo, cloth £2.00
BREAD & BISCUIT BAKER'S & SUGAR-BOILER'S ASSISTANT. Including a large variety of Modern Recipes. By Robert Wells. Fifth Edition. Crown 8vo, cloth 1/0
BREAD & BISCUIT BAKER'S & SUGAR-BOILER'S ASSISTANT. Featuring a wide range of modern recipes. By Robert Wells. Fifth Edition. Crown 8vo, cloth 1/0
"A large number of wrinkles for the ordinary cook, as well as the baker." —Saturday Review.
"A lot of wrinkles for the average cook and baker." —Saturday Review.
BREAKFAST DISHES. For every Morning of Three Months. By Miss
Allen (Mrs. A. Macaire).
Author of "Savouries and Sweets," &c. Twenty-third Edition. F'cap 8vo. Sewed
1/0
Or, quarter bound, fancy boards 1/6
BREAKFAST DISHES. For Every Morning of Three Months. By Miss
Allen (Mrs. A. Macaire).
Author of "Savouries and Sweets," etc. Twenty-third Edition. F'cap 8vo. Sewed
£1.00
Or, quarter-bound, decorative boards £1.50
BREWERS, HANDY BOOK FOR. Being a Practical Guide to the Art of Brewing and Malting. Embracing the Conclusions of Modern Research which bear upon the Practice of Brewing. By H. E. Wright, M.A. Third Edition. Thoroughly Revised and Enlarged. Large Crown 8vo, 578 pp., cloth Net 12/6
BREWERS, HANDY BOOK FOR. A Practical Guide to Brewing and Malting. Including the Findings of Modern Research Related to Brewing Practices. By H. E. Wright, M.A. Third Edition. Completely Revised and Expanded. Large Crown 8vo, 578 pp., cloth Net 12:00 PM
Barley, Malting and Malt — Water for Brewing — Hops and Sugars — The Brewing Room — Chemistry as Applied to Brewing — The Laboratory — Mashing, Sparging, and Boiling — Ferments in General — Fermentation With Commercial Yeast — Culture from a Single Cell with Yeasts — Treatment of Beer — The Brewery and Plants.
Barley, Malting, and Malt — Water for Brewing — Hops and Sugars — The Brewing Room — Chemistry in Brewing — The Lab — Mashing, Sparging, and Boiling — Yeasts in General — Fermentation with Commercial Yeast — Culturing Yeasts from a Single Cell — Beer Treatment — The Brewery and Equipment.
"We have great pleasure in recommending this handy Book." —The Brewers' Guardian.
"We're excited to recommend this handy book." —The Brewers' Guardian.
CALCULATOR, NUMBER, WEIGHT AND FRACTIONAL. Containing upwards of 250,000 Separate Calculations, showing at a Glance the Value at 422 Different Rates, ranging from 1/128th of a Penny to 20s. each, or per cwt., and £20 per ton, of any number of articles consecutively, from 1 to 470. Any number of cwts., qrs., and lbs., from 1 cwt. to 470 cwts. Any number of tons, cwts., qrs., and lbs., from 1 to 1,000 tons. By William Chadwick, Public Accountant. Fourth Edition, Revised and Improved. 8vo, strongly bound 18/0
CALCULATOR, NUMBER, WEIGHT AND FRACTIONAL. Contains over 250,000 separate calculations, showing at a glance the value at 422 different rates, ranging from 1/128th of a penny to 20 shillings each, or per hundredweight, and £20 per ton, for any number of articles from 1 to 470. Any number of hundredweights, quarters, and pounds, from 1 hundredweight to 470 hundredweights. Any number of tons, hundredweights, quarters, and pounds, from 1 to 1,000 tons. By William Chadwick, Public Accountant. Fourth Edition, Revised and Improved. 8vo, strongly bound 18/0
"It is as easy of reference for any answer or any number of answers as a dictionary. For making up accounts or estimates the book must prove invaluable to all who have any considerable quantity of calculations involving price and measure in any combination to do." —Engineer.
"It is just as easy to look up any answer or multiple answers as it is in a dictionary. For creating accounts or estimates, this book will undoubtedly be invaluable to anyone needing to handle a significant amount of calculations involving price and measurements in any combination." —Engineer.
"The most perfect work of the kind yet prepared." —Glasgow Herald.
"The best work of its kind so far." —Glasgow Herald.
CEMENTS, PASTES, GLUES, AND GUMS. A Guide to the Manufacture and Application of Agglutinants for Workshop, Laboratory, or Office Use. With 900 Recipes and Formulæ. By H. C. Standage, Crown 8vo, cloth 2/0
CEMENTS, PASTES, GLUES, AND GUMS. A Guide to Making and Using Adhesives for Workshop, Laboratory, or Office Applications. With 900 Recipes and Formulas. By H. C. Standage, Crown 8vo, cloth 2/0
"As a revelation of what are considered trade secrets, this book will arouse an amount of curiosity among the large number of industries it touches." —Daily Chronicle.
"As a disclosure of what are seen as trade secrets, this book will spark curiosity among the many industries it impacts." —Daily Chronicle.
CHEMISTRY FOR ARMY AND MATRICULATION CANDIDATES. By Geoffrey Martin, B.Sc., Ph.D. Crown 8vo, cloth. With numerous Illustrations Net 2/0
CHEMISTRY FOR ARMY AND MATRICULATION CANDIDATES. By Geoffrey Martin, B.Sc., Ph.D. Crown 8vo, cloth. With many illustrations Network 2/0
Preparation and Use of Apparatus — Preparation and Properties of Certain Gases and Liquids — Simple Quantitative Experiments — Analytical Operations — Solubility — Water Crystallisation — Neutralisation of Acids by Bases, and Preparation of Simple Salts — Volumetric Analysis — Chemical Equivalents — Observation of Reaction — Melting and Boiling Points — Symbols and Atomic Weights of the Elements — Weights and Measures — Hints on Regulating Work in Practical Chemistry Classes.
Getting Ready and Using Equipment — Preparing and Understanding Specific Gases and Liquids — Basic Quantitative Experiments — Analytical Methods — Solubility — Water Crystallization — Neutralizing Acids with Bases and Creating Simple Salts — Volumetric Analysis — Chemical Equivalents — Observing Reactions — Melting and Boiling Points — Symbols and Atomic Weights of Elements — Weights and Measurements — Tips for Managing Practical Chemistry Classes.
CLOCKS, WATCHES, & BELLS for PUBLIC PURPOSES. By Edmund Beckett, Lord Grimthorpe, LL.D., K.C., F.R.A.S. Eighth Edition, with new List of Great Bells and an Appendix on Weathercocks. Crown 8vo, cloth 4/6; cloth boards, 5/6
CLOCKS, WATCHES, & BELLS for PUBLIC PURPOSES. By Edmund Beckett, Lord Grimthorpe, LL.D., K.C., F.R.A.S. Eighth Edition, with an updated List of Great Bells and an Appendix on Weather Vanes. Crown 8vo, cloth £4.60; cloth boards, £5.60
"The only modern treatise on clock-making." —Horological Journal.
"The only recent guide on making clocks." —Horological Journal.
COACH-BUILDING. A Practical Treatise, Historical and Descriptive. By J. W. Burgess. Crown 8vo, cloth 2/6
COACH-BUILDING. A Practical Guide, Historical and Descriptive. By J. W. Burgess. Crown 8vo, cloth 2/6
COKE—MODERN COKING PRACTICE. Including the Analysis of Materials and Products. A handbook for those engaged or interested in Coke Manufacture with recovery of By-Products. By T. H. Byrom, F.I.C., F.C.S., Mem. Soc. of Chem. Industry, Chief Chemist to the Wigan Coal and Iron Company. For fifteen years Lecturer at the Wigan Technical College. Author of "The Physics and Chemistry of Mining"; and J. E. Christopher, Mem. Soc. of Chem. Industry, Sub-manager of the Semet Solvay Coking Plant of the Wigan Coal and Iron Company. Lecturer on Coke Manufacture at the Wigan Technical College. 168 pages, with numerous illustrations. Demy 8vo, cloth. [Just Published Net] 8/6
COKE—MODERN COKING PRACTICE. Including the Analysis of Materials and Products. A handbook for anyone involved or interested in Coke Production with By-Product Recovery. By T. H. Byrom, F.I.C., F.C.S., Member of the Society of Chemical Industry, Chief Chemist at the Wigan Coal and Iron Company. For fifteen years, Lecturer at the Wigan Technical College. Author of "The Physics and Chemistry of Mining"; and J. E. Chris, Member of the Society of Chemical Industry, Assistant Manager of the Semet Solvay Coking Plant at the Wigan Coal and Iron Company. Lecturer on Coke Production at the Wigan Technical College. 168 pages, with many illustrations. Demy 8vo, cloth. [Just Published Net] 8/6
"The authors have succeeded in treating the subject in a clear and compact way, giving an easily comprehensible review of the different processes." —Mining Journal.
"The authors have done a great job of presenting the topic clearly and concisely, providing an easy-to-understand overview of the various processes." —Mining Journal.
"The book will be eagerly read, and the authors may be assured that their labour will be appreciated. We anticipate that the book will be a success; at any rate it possesses the necessary merit." —Science and Art of Mining.
"The book will be eagerly read, and the authors can be assured that their work will be appreciated. We expect that the book will be a success; in any case, it has the necessary merit." —Science and Art of Mining.
COMMERCIAL CORRESPONDENT, FOREIGN. Being Aids to Commercial Correspondence in Five Languages—English, French, German, Italian, and Spanish. By Conrad E. Baker. Third Edition, Carefully Revised Throughout. Crown 8vo, cloth 4/6
COMMERCIAL CORRESPONDENT, FOREIGN. Aids for Commercial Correspondence in Five Languages—English, French, German, Italian, and Spanish. By Conrad E. Baker. Third Edition, Fully Revised. Crown 8vo, cloth 4/6
"Whoever wishes to correspond in all the languages mentioned by Mr. Baker cannot do better than study this work, the materials of which are excellent and conveniently arranged. They consist not of entire specimen letters, but—what are far more useful—short passages, sentences, or phrases expressing the same general idea in various forms." —Athenæum.
"Anyone who wants to communicate in all the languages mentioned by Mr. Baker should definitely study this work, which has excellent and well-organized materials. Instead of complete sample letters, it offers something much more useful—short passages, sentences, or phrases that convey the same general idea in different ways." —Athenæum.
CONFECTIONER, MODERN FLOUR. Containing a large Collection of Recipes for Cheap Cakes, Biscuits, &c. With remarks on the Ingredients Used in their Manufacture. By R. Wells 1/0
BAKER, MODERN FLOUR. Featuring a comprehensive collection of recipes for budget-friendly cakes, cookies, etc. With comments on the ingredients used in their preparation. By R. Wells 1/0
CONFECTIONERY, ORNAMENTAL. A Guide for Bakers, Confectioners and Pastrycooks; including a variety of Modern Recipes, and Remarks on Decorative and Coloured Work. With 129 Original Designs. By Robert Wells. Crown 8vo, cloth 5/0
CONFECTIONERY, ORNAMENTAL. A Guide for Bakers, Confectioners, and Pastry Chefs; featuring a range of modern recipes and insights on decorative and colored work. With 129 original designs. By Robert Wells. Crown 8vo, cloth 5/0
"A valuable work, practical, and should be in the hands of every baker and confectioner. The illustrative designs are worth treble the amount charged for the work." —Bakers' Times.
"A valuable resource that's practical and should be in the hands of every baker and confectioner. The design illustrations are worth three times what you pay for this book." —Bakers' Times.
COTTON MANUFACTURE. A Manual of Practical Instruction of the Processes of Opening, Carding, Combing, Drawing, Doubling and Spinning, Methods of Dyeing, &c. For the Use of Operatives, Overlookers, and Manufacturers. By J. Lister. 8vo, cloth 7/6
COTTON MANUFACTURE. A Practical Guide to the Processes of Opening, Carding, Combing, Drawing, Doubling, and Spinning, Methods of Dyeing, etc. For the Use of Workers, Supervisors, and Manufacturers. By J. Lister. 8vo, cloth 7/6
DANGEROUS GOODS. Their Sources and Properties, Modes of Storage and Transport. With Notes and Comments on Accidents arising therefrom. For the Use of Government and Railway Officials, Steamship Owners, &c. By H. J. Phillips. Crown 8vo, cloth 9/0
DANGEROUS GOODS. Their Sources and Properties, Methods of Storage and Transport. With Notes and Comments on Accidents that may occur. For the Use of Government and Railway Officials, Steamship Owners, etc. By H. J. Phillips. Crown 8vo, cloth 9/0
DISCOUNT GUIDE. Comprising several Series of Tables for the Use of Merchants, Manufacturers, Ironmongers, and Others, by which may be ascertained the Exact Profit arising from any mode of using Discounts, either in the Purchase or Sale of Goods, and the method of either Altering a Rate of Discount, or Advancing a Price, so as to produce, by one operation, a sum that will realise any required Profit after allowing one or more Discounts: to which are added Tables of Profit or Advance from 1¼ to 90 per cent., Tables of Discount from 1¼ to 98¾ per cent., and Tables of Commission, &c., from ⅛ to 10 per cent. By Henry Harben, Accountant. New Edition, Corrected. Demy 8vo, half-bound £1 5s.
DISCOUNT GUIDE. This includes several series of tables for merchants, manufacturers, ironmongers, and others, which help determine the exact profit from using discounts in the purchase or sale of goods. It also explains how to change a discount rate or increase a price to generate a profit after applying one or more discounts. Additionally, it features tables showing profit or advance from 1¼ to 90 percent, discount tables from 1¼ to 98¾ percent, and commission tables from ⅛ to 10 percent. By Henry Harben, Accountant. New Edition, Corrected. Demy 8vo, half-bound £1 5s.
"A book such as this can only be appreciated by business men, to whom the saving of time means saving of money. The work must prove of great value to merchants, manufacturers, and general traders." —British Trade Journal.
"A book like this can only be valued by businesspeople, for whom saving time means saving money. This work will be extremely useful to merchants, manufacturers, and general traders." —British Trade Journal.
DRYING MACHINERY AND PRACTICE. A Handbook on the Theory and Practice of Drying and Desiccating, with Classified Description of Installations, Machinery, and Apparatus, including also a Glossary of Technical Terms and Bibliography. By Thomas G. Marlow, Grinding, Drying, and Separating Machinery Specialist. Medium 8vo. About 250 pages, with 150 Illustrations [In the Press, price about 12/6 net.]
DRYING MACHINERY AND PRACTICE. A Handbook on the Theory and Practice of Drying and Desiccating, with a Classified Description of Installations, Machinery, and Equipment, including a Glossary of Technical Terms and a Bibliography. By Thomas G. Marlow, Specialist in Grinding, Drying, and Separating Machinery. Medium 8vo. Approximately 250 pages, with 150 Illustrations In the Press, price about £12.30 net.
ELECTRICITY IN FACTORIES AND WORKSHOPS: ITS COST AND CONVENIENCE. A Handbook for Power Producers and Power Users. By A. P. Haslam, M.I.E.E. 328 pages, with numerous illustrations. Large crown, 8vo, cloth Net 7/6
ELECTRICITY IN FACTORIES AND WORKSHOPS: ITS COST AND CONVENIENCE. A Handbook for Power Producers and Power Users. By A. P. Haslam, M.I.E.E. 328 pages, with many illustrations. Large crown, 8vo, cloth Net 7/6
ELECTRO-METALLURGY. A Practical Treatise. By Alexander Watt. Tenth Edition, enlarged and revised. Including the most Recent Processes. Crown 8vo, cloth 3/6
ELECTRO-METALLURGY. A Practical Guide. By Alex Watt. Tenth Edition, updated and expanded. Featuring the Latest Processes. Crown 8vo, cloth 3/6
ELECTRO-PLATING. A Practical Handbook on the Deposition of Copper, Silver, Nickel, Gold, Aluminium, Brass, Platinum, &c., &c. By J. W. Urquhart, C.E. Fifth Edition, Revised. Crown 8vo, cloth 5/0
ELECTRO-PLATING. A Practical Handbook on the Deposition of Copper, Silver, Nickel, Gold, Aluminum, Brass, Platinum, etc., etc. By J. W. Urquhart, C.E. Fifth Edition, Revised. Crown 8vo, cloth 5/0
ELECTRO-PLATING & ELECTRO-REFINING OF METALS Being a new edition of Alexander Watt's "Electro-Deposition." Revised and Rewritten by A. Philip, B.Sc., Principal Assistant to the Admiralty Chemist. Crown 8vo, cloth Net 12/6
ELECTRO-PLATING & ELECTRO-REFINING OF METALS This is a new edition of Alex Watt's "Electroplating." Revised and Rewritten by A. Philip, B.Sc., Principal Assistant to the Admiralty Chemist. Crown 8vo, cloth Net 12/6
PART I. ELECTRO-PLATING — Preliminary Considerations — Primary and
Secondary Batteries — Thermopiles — Dynamos — Cost of Electrical
Installations of Small Output for Electro-Plating — Historical Review of
Electro Deposition — Electro Deposition of Copper — Deposition of Gold by
Simple Immersion — Electro Deposition of Gold — Various Gilding
Operations — Mercury Gilding — Electro Deposition of Silver — Imitation
Antique Silver — Electro Deposition of Nickel, Tin, Iron and Zinc,
Various Metals and Alloys — Recovery of Gold and Silver from Wash
Solutions — Mechanical Operations connected with Electro
Deposition — Materials Used in Electro Deposition.
PART II. ELECTRO
METALLURGY — Electro Metallurgy of Copper — Cost of Electrolytic Copper
Refining — Current Density as a Factor in Profits — Some Important Details
in Electrolytic Copper Refineries — Electrolytic Gold and Silver Bullion
Refining — Electrolytic Treatment of Tin — Electrolytic Refining of
Lead — Electrolytic Production of Aluminium and Electrolytic Refining of
Nickel — Electro Galvanising.
PART I. ELECTRO-PLATING — Initial Considerations — Primary and Secondary Batteries — Thermopiles — Dynamos — Cost of Electrical Installations for Small-Scale Electro-Plating — Historical Overview of Electro Deposition — Electro Deposition of Copper — Gold Deposition by Simple Immersion — Electro Deposition of Gold — Different Gilding Processes — Mercury Gilding — Electro Deposition of Silver — Imitation Antique Silver — Electro Deposition of Nickel, Tin, Iron, and Zinc, Various Metals and Alloys — Recovery of Gold and Silver from Wash Solutions — Mechanical Processes Related to Electro Deposition — Materials Used in Electro Deposition.
PART II. ELECTRO METALLURGY — Electro Metallurgy of Copper — Cost of Electrolytic Copper Refining — Current Density as a Factor in Profitability — Key Details in Electrolytic Copper Refineries — Electrolytic Gold and Silver Bullion Refining — Electrolytic Treatment of Tin — Electrolytic Refining of Lead — Electrolytic Production of Aluminum and Electrolytic Refining of Nickel — Electro Galvanizing.
"Eminently a book for the practical worker in electro-deposition." —Engineer.
"Eminently a book for the hands-on worker in electro-deposition." —Engineer.
ELECTRO-TYPING. The Reproduction and Multiplication of Printing Surfaces and Works of Art by the Electro-Deposition of Metals. By J. W. Urquhart, C.E. Crown 8vo, cloth 5/0
ELECTRO-TYPING. The Reproduction and Multiplication of Printing Surfaces and Works of Art by the Electro-Deposition of Metals. By J. W. Urquhart, C.E. Crown 8vo, cloth 5/0
ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY. A Practical Treatise for the Use of Analytical Chemists, Engineers, Iron Masters, Iron Founders, Students and others. Comprising Methods of Analysis and Valuation of the Principal Materials used in Engineering Work, with numerous Analyses, Examples and Suggestions. By H. Phillips. Third Edition, Revised. Crown 8vo, 420 pp., with Illustrations, cloth Net 10/6
ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY. A Practical Guide for Analytical Chemists, Engineers, Iron Manufacturers, Iron Founders, Students, and Others. It includes Methods for Analyzing and Valuing the Main Materials used in Engineering Projects, with many Analyses, Examples, and Suggestions. By H. Phillips. Third Edition, Revised. Crown 8vo, 420 pages, with Illustrations, cloth Net 10/6
EXPLOSIVES, MODERN, A HANDBOOK ON. A Practical Treatise on the Manufacture and Use of Dynamite, Gun-Cotton, Nitro-Glycerine and other Explosive Compounds, including Collodion-Cotton. With Chapters on Explosives in Practical Application. By M. Eissler, M.E. Second Edition, Enlarged. Crown 8vo, cloth 12/6
EXPLOSIVES, MODERN, A HANDBOOK ON. A Practical Guide to the Manufacture and Use of Dynamite, Gun-Cotton, Nitro-Glycerine, and other Explosive Compounds, including Collodion-Cotton. Featuring Chapters on Explosives in Real-World Applications. By M. Eissler, M.E. Second Edition, Expanded. Crown 8vo, cloth £12.60
"A veritable mine of information on the subject of explosives employed for military, mining, and blasting purposes." —Army and Navy Gazette.
"A true treasure trove of information on the topic of explosives used for military, mining, and blasting purposes." —Army and Navy Gazette.
EXPLOSIVES: NITRO-EXPLOSIVES. The Properties, Manufacture, and Analysis of Nitrated Substances, including the Fulminates, Smokeless Powders, and Celluloid. By P. G. Sanford, F.I.C., F.C.S., Public Analyst to the Borough of Penzance. Second Edition, enlarged. With Illustrations. Demy 8vo, cloth Net 10/6
EXPLOSIVES: NITRO-EXPLOSIVES. The Properties, Manufacture, and Analysis of Nitrated Substances, including Fulminates, Smokeless Powders, and Celluloid. By P. G. Sanford, F.I.C., F.C.S., Public Analyst for the Borough of Penzance. Second Edition, updated. With Illustrations. Demy 8vo, cloth Net 10/6
Nitro-Glycerine — Nitro-Cellulose, etc. — Dynamite — Nitro-Benzol, Roburite, Bellite, Picric Acid, etc. — The Fulminates — Smokeless Powders in General — Analysis of Explosives — Firing Point, Heat Tests, Determination of Relative Strength, etc.
Nitroglycerin — Nitrocellulose, etc. — Dynamite — Nitrobenzene, Roburite, Bellite, Picric Acid, etc. — The Fulminates — Smokeless Powders in General — Analysis of Explosives — Firing Point, Heat Tests, Determination of Relative Strength, etc.
"One of the very few text-books in which can be found just what is wanted. Mr. Sanford goes steadily through the whole list of explosives commonly used, he names any given explosive, and tells of what it is composed and how it is manufactured. The book is excellent." —Engineer.
"One of the very few textbooks that has exactly what you need. Mr. Sanford goes through the entire list of commonly used explosives, names each one, and explains what it's made of and how it's manufactured. The book is excellent." —Engineer.
FACTORY ACCOUNTS: THEIR PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE. A Handbook for Accountants and Manufacturers, with Appendices on the Nomenclature of Machine Details, the Income Tax Acts, the Rating of Factories, Fire and Boiler Insurance, the Factory and Workshop Acts, etc., including a Glossary of Terms and a large number of Specimen Rulings. By Emile Garcke and J. M. Fells. Fifth Edition, Revised and Enlarged. Demy 8vo, cloth 7/6
FACTORY ACCOUNTS: THEIR PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE. A Handbook for Accountants and Manufacturers, including Appendices on the Terminology of Machine Details, the Income Tax Acts, Factory Valuations, Fire and Boiler Insurance, the Factory and Workshop Acts, etc., along with a Glossary of Terms and numerous Example Rulings. By Emile Garcke and J. M. Fell woods. Fifth Edition, Revised and Expanded. Demy 8vo, cloth 7/6
"A very interesting description of the requirements of Factory Accounts.... The principle of assimilating the Factory Accounts to the general commercial books is one which we thoroughly agree with." —Accountants' Journal.
"A really interesting take on what Factory Accounts need.... We completely agree with the idea of aligning Factory Accounts with the general business records." —Accountants' Journal.
FLOUR MANUFACTURE. A Treatise on Milling Science and Practice. By Friedrich Kick, Imperial Regierungsrath, Professor of Mechanical Technology in the Imperial German Polytechnic Institute, Prague. Translated from the Second Enlarged and Revised Edition. By H. H. P. Powles, A.M.Inst.C.E. 400 pp., with 28 Folding Plates, and 167 Woodcuts. Royal 8vo, cloth £1 5s.
FLOUR MANUFACTURE. A Guide to Milling Science and Practice. By Friedrich Kick, Imperial Government Advisor, Professor of Mechanical Technology at the Imperial German Polytechnic Institute, Prague. Translated from the Second Enlarged and Revised Edition by H. H. P. Powles, A.M.Inst.C.E. 400 pages, with 28 Fold-out Plates and 167 Illustrations. Royal 8vo, cloth £1 5s.
"This invaluable work is the standard authority on the science of milling." —The Miller.
"This essential work is the go-to source on the science of milling." —The Miller.
FRENCH POLISHING AND ENAMELLING. Including numerous Recipes for making Polishes, Varnishes, Glaze, Lacquers, Revivers, &c. By R. Bitmead. Crown 8vo, cloth 1/6
FRENCH POLISHING AND ENAMELLING. Featuring various recipes for creating polishes, varnishes, glazes, lacquers, revivers, etc. By R. Bitmead. Crown 8vo, cloth £1.50
GAS ENGINEER'S POCKET-BOOK. Comprising Tables, Notes and Memoranda relating to the Manufacture, Distribution and Use of Coal Gas and the Construction of Gas Works. By H. O'Connor, A.M.Inst.C.E. Third Edition. Revised. Crown 8vo, leather. Net 10/6
GAS ENGINEER'S POCKET-BOOK. This book contains tables, notes, and reminders related to the production, distribution, and usage of coal gas, as well as the building of gas facilities. By H. O'Connor, A.M.Inst.C.E. Third Edition. Revised. Crown 8vo, leather. Net 10.6
GENERAL CONSTRUCTING MEMORANDA — General Mathematical Tables — Unloading Materials and Storage — Retort House — Condensers — Boilers, Engines, Pumps, and Exhausters — Scrubbers and Washers — Purifiers — Gasholder Tanks — Gasholders — Workshop Notes — MANUFACTURING — Storing Materials — Retort House (Working) — Condensing Gas — Exhausters, etc. — Washing and Scrubbing — Purification — Gasholders (Care of) — Distributing Gas — Testing — Enriching Processes — Product Works — Supplementary.
GENERAL CONSTRUCTION MEMORANDA — General Math Tables — Unloading Materials and Storage — Retort House — Condensers — Boilers, Engines, Pumps, and Exhausters — Scrubbers and Washers — Purifiers — Gasholder Tanks — Gasholders — Workshop Notes — MANUFACTURING — Storing Materials — Retort House (Operations) — Gas Condensation — Exhausters, etc. — Washing and Scrubbing — Purification — Gasholders (Maintenance) — Gas Distribution — Testing — Enrichment Processes — Product Works — Supplementary.
"The book contains a vast amount of information." —Gas World.
"The book contains a lot of information." —Gas World.
GAS ENGINEERING. See Producer Gas Practice and Industrial Gas Engineering.
GAS ENGINEERING. See Producer Gas Practices and Industrial Gas Engineering.
GAS FITTING. A Practical Handbook. By John Black. Revised Edition. With 130 Illustrations. Crown 8vo, cloth 2/6
GAS FITTING. A Practical Handbook. By John Black. Revised Edition. With 130 Illustrations. Crown 8vo, cloth £2.50
GAS LIGHTING. See Acetylene.
Gaslighting. See Acetylene.
GAS LIGHTING FOR COUNTRY HOUSES. See Petrol Air Gas.
GAS LIGHTING FOR COUNTRY HOUSES. See Gasoline Air Gas.
GAS MANUFACTURE, CHEMISTRY OF. A Practical Manual for the use of Gas Engineers, Gas Managers and Students. By Harold M. Royle, Chief Chemical Assistant at the Beckton Gas Works. Demy 8vo, cloth, 340 pages, with numerous Illustrations and Coloured Plate. Net 12/6
GAS MANUFACTURE, CHEMISTRY OF. A Practical Manual for Gas Engineers, Gas Managers, and Students. By Harold M. Royle, Chief Chemical Assistant at the Beckton Gas Works. Demy 8vo, cloth, 340 pages, with many Illustrations and a Colored Plate. Net 12/6
Preparation of Standard Solutions — Analysis of Coals — Description of Various Types of Furnaces — Products of Carbonisation at Various Temperatures — Analysis of Crude Gas — Analysis of Lime — Analysis of Ammoniacal Liquor — Analytical Valuation of Oxide of Iron — Estimation of Naphthalin — Analysis of Fire-Bricks and Fire-Clay — Art of Photometry — Carburetted Water Gas — Appendix containing Statutory and Official Regulations for Testing Gas. Valuable Excerpts from Various important papers on Gas Chemistry, Useful Tables, Memoranda, etc.
Preparing Standard Solutions — Analyzing Coals — Overview of Different Types of Furnaces — Products of Carbonization at Various Temperatures — Analysis of Raw Gas — Analysis of Lime — Analysis of Ammoniacal Liquor — Analytical Valuation of Iron Oxide — Estimation of Naphthalene — Analysis of Fire Bricks and Fire Clay — Art of Photometry — Carburetted Water Gas — Appendix with Legal and Official Regulations for Gas Testing. Important Excerpts from Key Papers on Gas Chemistry, Useful Tables, and Memoranda., etc.
GAS WORKS. Their Construction and Arrangement, and the Manufacture and Distribution of Coal Gas. By S. Hughes, C.E. Ninth Edition. Revised by H. O'Connor, A.M.Inst.C.E. Crown 8vo 6/0
GAS WORKS. Their Construction and Layout, and the Production and Distribution of Coal Gas. By S. Hughes, C.E. Ninth Edition. Revised by H. O'Connor, A.M.Inst.C.E. Crown 8vo £6.00
GOLD WORKING. JEWELLER'S ASSISTANT for Masters and Workmen, Compiled from the Experience of Thirty Years' Workshop Practice. By G. E. Gee. Crown 8vo 7/6
GOLD WORKING. JEWELLER'S ASSISTANT for Masters and Workers, Compiled from the Experience of Thirty Years' Workshop Practice. By G. E. Wow. Crown 8vo 7/6
GOLDSMITH'S HANDBOOK. Alloying, Melting, Reducing, Colouring, Collecting, and Refining. Manipulation, Recovery of Waste, Chemical and Physical Properties; Solders, Enamels, and other useful Rules and Recipes, &c. By G. E. Gee, Sixth Edition. Crown 8vo, cloth 3/0
GOLDSMITH'S HANDBOOK. Alloying, Melting, Reducing, Coloring, Collecting, and Refining. Manipulation, Recovery of Waste, Chemical and Physical Properties; Solders, Enamels, and other useful Rules and Recipes, etc. By G. E. Wow, Sixth Edition. Crown 8vo, cloth 3/0
GOLDSMITH'S AND SILVERSMITH'S COMPLETE HANDBOOK. By G. E. Gee. Crown 8vo, half bound 7/0
GOLDSMITH'S AND SILVERSMITH'S COMPLETE HANDBOOK. By G. E. Wow. Crown 8vo, half bound 7/0
HALL-MARKING OF JEWELLERY. Comprising an account of all the different Assay Towns of the United Kingdom, with the Stamps at present employed; also the Laws relating to the Standards and Hall-marks at the various Assay Offices. By G. E. Gee. Crown 8vo 3/0
HALL-MARKING OF JEWELLERY. This includes a description of all the various Assay Towns in the United Kingdom, along with the current stamps in use; it also covers the laws regarding the standards and hallmarks at the different Assay Offices. By G. E. Wow. Crown 8vo 3/0
HANDYBOOKS FOR HANDICRAFTS. By Paul N. Hasluck. See page 16.
HANDYBOOKS FOR HANDICRAFTS. By Paul N. Hasluck. See page 16.
HOROLOGY, MODERN, IN THEORY AND PRACTICE. Translated from the French of Claudius Saunier, ex-Director of the School of Horology at Macon, by Julien Tripplin, F.R.A.S., Besançon Watch Manufacturer, and Edward Rigg, M.A., Assayer in the Royal Mint. With Seventy-eight Woodcuts and Twenty-two Coloured Copper Plates. Second Edition. Super-royal 8vo, £2 2s. cloth; half-calf £2 10s.
HOROLOGY, MODERN, IN THEORY AND PRACTICE. Translated from the French of Claudius Saunier, former Director of the School of Horology in Macon, by Julien Tripplin, F.R.A.S., watch manufacturer from Besançon, and Edward Rigg, M.A., assayer at the Royal Mint. Featuring seventy-eight illustrations and twenty-two colored copper plates. Second Edition. Super-royal 8vo, £2.10. in cloth; half-calf £2.50
"There is no horological work in the English language at all to be compared to this production of M. Saunier's for clearness and completeness. It is alike good as a guide for the student and as a reference for the experienced horologist and skilled workman." —Horological Journal.
"There is no clockmaking work in English that compares to M. Saunier's for clarity and thoroughness. It's equally great as a guide for students and as a reference for experienced watchmakers and skilled craftsmen." —Horological Journal.
ILLUMINATING AND MISSAL PAINTING ON PAPER AND VELLUM. A Practical Treatise on Manuscript Work, Testimonials, and Herald Painting, with Chapters on Lettering and Writing, and on Mediæval Burnished Gold. With two Coloured Plates. By Philip Whithard (First-class Diploma for Illumination and Herald Painting, Printing Trades Exhibition, 1906). 156 pages. Crown 8vo, cloth Net 4/0
ILLUMINATING AND MISSAL PAINTING ON PAPER AND VELLUM. A Practical Guide to Manuscript Work, Testimonials, and Herald Painting, with Chapters on Lettering and Writing, and on Medieval Burnished Gold. Featuring two Colored Plates. By Philip Whithard (First-class Diploma for Illumination and Herald Painting, Printing Trades Exhibition, 1906). 156 pages. Crown 8vo, cloth Net 4.0
INTEREST CALCULATOR. Containing Tables at 1, 1½, 2, 2½, 3, 3½, 3¾, 4, 4½, 4¾ and 5 per cent. By A. M. Campbell, Author of "The Concise Calendar." Crown 8vo, cloth Net 2/6
INTEREST CALCULATOR. Featuring tables at 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 3.75, 4, 4.5, 4.75, and 5 percent. By A. M. Campbell, author of "The Concise Calendar." Crown 8vo, cloth Internet 2/6
IRON AND METAL TRADES' COMPANION. For Expeditiously ascertaining the Value of any Goods bought or sold by Weight, from 1s. per cwt. to 112s. per cwt., and from one farthing per pound to one shilling per pound. By Thomas Downie. Strongly bound in leather, 396 pp. 9/0
IRON AND METAL TRADES' COMPANION. For quickly determining the value of any goods bought or sold by weight, ranging from 1s. per hundredweight to 112s. per hundredweight, and from one farthing per pound to one shilling per pound. By Thomas Downie. Strongly bound in leather, 396 pages. 9/0
"A most useful set of tables. Nothing like them before existed." —Building News.
"A really helpful set of tables. Nothing like them has ever existed before." —Building News.
IRON-PLATE WEIGHT TABLES. For Iron Shipbuilders, Engineers and Iron Merchants. Containing the Calculated Weights of upwards of 150,000 different sizes of Iron Plates, from 1 ft. by 6 ins. by ¼ in. to 10 ft. by 5 ft. by 1 in. Worked out on the basis of 40 lbs. to the square foot of iron of 1 in. in thickness. By H. Burlinson and W. H. Simpson. 4to, half bound £1 5s.
IRON-PLATE WEIGHT TABLES. For Iron Shipbuilders, Engineers, and Iron Merchants. This includes the calculated weights of over 150,000 different sizes of iron plates, ranging from 1 ft. by 6 ins. by ¼ in. to 10 ft. by 5 ft. by 1 in. Calculated based on 40 lbs. per square foot of iron with a thickness of 1 in. By H. Burlinson and W. H. Simpson. 4to, half bound £1 5s.
LABOUR CONTRACTS. A Popular Handbook on the Law of Contracts or Works and Services. By David Gibbons. Fourth Edition, with Appendix of Statutes by T. F. Uttley; Solicitor. F'cap. 8vo, cloth 3/6
LABOUR CONTRACTS. A Popular Handbook on the Law of Contracts or Work and Services. By David Gibbons. Fourth Edition, with Appendix of Statutes by T. F. Uttley; Solicitor. F'cap. 8vo, cloth 3/6
LAUNDRY MANAGEMENT. A Handbook for use in Private and Public Laundries. Cr. 8vo, cloth 2/0
LAUNDRY MANAGEMENT. A Handbook for use in Private and Public Laundries. Cr. 8vo, cloth £2.00
LAW FOR MANUFACTURERS, EMPLOYERS AND OTHERS, ETC. See "Every Man's Own Lawyer." A Handy-book of the Principles of Law and Equity. By a Barrister. Forty-seventh (1910) Edition, including the Legislation of 1909. 830 pp. Large crown 8vo, cloth [Just Published.] Net 6/8
LAW FOR MANUFACTURERS, EMPLOYERS AND OTHERS, ETC. See "Every Person's Own Lawyer." A Handy-book of the Principles of Law and Equity. By a Lawyer. Forty-seventh (1910) Edition, including the Legislation of 1909. 830 pp. Large crown 8vo, cloth [Just Published.] Net 6/8
SUMMARY OF CONTENTS: Landlord and Tenant — Vendors and Purchasers — Contracts and Agreements — Conveyances and Mortgages — Joint-stock Companies — Partnership — Shipping Law — Dealings with Money — Suretiship — Cheques, Bills and Notes — Bills of Sale — Bankruptcy — Masters, Servants and Workmen — Insurance: Life, Accident, etc. — Copyright, Patents. Trade Marks — Husband and Wife, Divorce — Infancy, Custody of Children — Trustees and Executors — Taxes and Death Duties — Clergymen, Doctors, and Lawyers — Parliamentary Elections — Local Government — Libel and Slander — Nuisances — Criminal Law — Game Laws, Gaming, Innkeepers — Forms of Wills, Agreements, Notices, etc.
SUMMARY OF CONTENTS: Landlord and Tenant — Sellers and Buyers — Contracts and Agreements — Transfers and Mortgages — Corporations — Partnerships — Maritime Law — Financial Transactions — Guarantors — Checks, Bills, and Notes — Bills of Sale — Bankruptcy — Employers, Employees, and Workers — Insurance: Life, Accident, etc. — Copyright, Patents, Trademarks — Marriage and Divorce — Minors, Child Custody — Trustees and Executors — Taxes and Estate Duties — Clergy, Doctors, and Lawyers — Parliamentary Elections — Local Government — Defamation — Public Nuisances — Criminal Law — Game Regulations, Gambling, Innkeepers — Templates for Wills, Agreements, Notices, etc.
"A useful and concise epitome of the law." —Law Magazine.
"A helpful and succinct summary of the law." —Law Magazine.
"A complete digest of the most useful facts which constitute English law." —Globe.
"A comprehensive summary of the most important facts that make up English law." —Globe.
"A dictionary of legal facts well put together. The book is a very useful one." —Spectator.
"A well-organized dictionary of legal facts. This book is really useful." —Spectator.
LEATHER MANUFACTURE. A Practical Handbook of Tanning, Currying, and Chrome Leather Dressing. By A. Watt. Fifth Edition, Revised and Enlarged. 8vo, cloth Net 12/6
LEATHER MANUFACTURE. A Practical Handbook of Tanning, Currying, and Chrome Leather Dressing. By A. Watt. Fifth Edition, Revised and Enlarged. 8vo, cloth Internet 12/6
Chemical Theory of the Tanning Process — The Skin — Hides and Skins — Tannin or Tannic Acid — Gallic Acid — Gallic Fermentation — Tanning Materials — Estimation of Tannin — Preliminary Operations — Depilation or Unhairing Skins and Hides — Deliming or Bating — Tanning Butts for Sole Leather — Tanning Processes — Tanning by Pressure — Quick Tanning — Harness Leather Tanning — American Tanning — Hemlock Tanning — Tanning by Electricity — Chemical Tanning — Miscellaneous Processes — Cost of American Tanning — Manufacture of Light Leathers — Dyeing Leather — Manufacture of White Leather — Chrome Leather Manufacture — Box Calf Manufacture — Chamois or Oil Leather Manufacture — Currying — Machinery Employed in Leather Manufacture — Embossing Leather — Fellmongering — Parchment, Vellum, and Shagreen — Gut Dressing — Glue Boiling — Utilisation of Tanner's Waste.
Chemical Theory of the Tanning Process — The Skin — Hides and Skins — Tannin or Tannic Acid — Gallic Acid — Gallic Fermentation — Tanning Materials — Estimation of Tannin — Preliminary Operations — Hair Removal from Skins and Hides — Deliming or Bating — Tanning Butts for Sole Leather — Tanning Processes — Tanning by Pressure — Quick Tanning — Harness Leather Tanning — American Tanning — Hemlock Tanning — Tanning by Electricity — Chemical Tanning — Various Processes — Cost of American Tanning — Production of Light Leathers — Dyeing Leather — Production of White Leather — Chrome Leather Production — Box Calf Production — Chamois or Oil Leather Production — Currying — Machinery Used in Leather Production — Embossing Leather — Fellmongering — Parchment, Vellum, and Shagreen — Gut Dressing — Glue Boiling — Utilization of Tanner's Waste.
"A sound, comprehensive treatise on tanning and its accessories." —Chemical Review.
"A thorough and complete guide to tanning and its related topics." —Chemical Review.
LEATHER MANUFACTURE. PRACTICAL TANNING: A Handbook of Modern Processes, Receipts and Suggestions for the Treatment of Hides, Skins, and Pelts of every description, including various Patents relating to Tanning, with specifications. By Louis A. Flemming, American Tanner. Second Edition, in great part re-written, thoroughly revised, and much enlarged. Illustrated by six full-page Plates. Medium 8vo, cloth, 630 pages [Just published.] Net 28/0
LEATHER MANUFACTURE. PRACTICAL TANNING: A Handbook of Modern Processes, Recipes, and Tips for Working with Hides, Skins, and Pelts of all kinds, including various Patents related to Tanning, with detailed specifications. By Louis A. Flemming, American Tanner. Second Edition, mostly rewritten, thoroughly updated, and significantly expanded. Illustrated with six full-page Plates. Medium 8vo, cloth, 630 pages Just published. Net 28/0
MAGNETOS FOR AUTOMOBILISTS, HOW MADE AND HOW USED. A Handbook of Practical Instruction in the Manufacture and Adaptation of the Magneto to the needs of the Motorist. By S. R. Bottone, late of the Collegio del Carmine, Turin, Author of "The Dynamo," "Ignition Devices," &c. Second Edition, enlarged. With 52 Illustrations. Crown 8vo, cloth Net 2/0
MAGNETOS FOR AUTOMOBILE DRIVERS: HOW THEY'RE MADE AND HOW TO USE THEM. A Practical Guide on Making and Adjusting the Magneto for Motorists. By S. R. Button, formerly of the Collegio del Carmine in Turin, Author of "The Dynamo," "Ignition Devices," etc. Second Edition, expanded. With 52 Illustrations. Crown 8vo, cloth Network 2/0
MARBLE AND MARBLE WORKING. A Handbook for Architects, Sculptors, Marble Quarry Owners and Workers, and all engaged in the Building and Decorative Industries. Containing numerous Illustrations and thirteen Coloured Plates. By W. G. Renwick, Author of "The Marble Industry," "The Working of Marble for Decorative Purposes," etc. 240 pages. Medium 8vo, cloth 15/0
MARBLE AND MARBLE WORKING. A Handbook for Architects, Sculptors, Marble Quarry Owners and Workers, and everyone involved in the Building and Decorative Industries. It includes many illustrations and thirteen colored plates. By W. G. Renwick, Author of "The Marble Industry," "The Working of Marble for Decorative Purposes," etc. 240 pages. Medium 8vo, cloth 15/0
The Chemistry of Marble — Its Geological Formation — A short Classification of Marbles — Antiquity of the Marble Industry — Ancient Quarries and Methods of Working — Modern Quarries and Quarrying Methods — Machinery used in Quarrying — European and American Systems compared — Marble as Building Material — Uses of Marble other than for Building Purposes-Sources of Production: Italian, French, Belgian, and Greek Marbles, etc. — Marbles of the United Kingdom and British Colonies — Continental Marble Working — Marble Working Machinery — Marble Working in the United States — American Machinery Described and Compared — Marble Working: A British industry — Marble Substitutes and Imitations — Practical Points for the Consideration of Architects — Hints on the Selection of Marble — List of Marbles in Ordinary Use, with Descriptive Notes and Instances of their Application.
The Chemistry of Marble — Its Geological Formation — A Brief Classification of Marbles — History of the Marble Industry — Ancient Quarries and Working Methods — Modern Quarries and Quarrying Techniques — Machinery Used in Quarrying — Comparing European and American Systems — Marble as a Building Material — Other Uses of Marble Beyond Building — Sources of Production: Italian, French, Belgian, and Greek Marbles, etc. — Marbles from the United Kingdom and British Colonies — Continental Marble Processing — Marble Processing Machinery — Marble Processing in the United States — Description and Comparison of American Machinery — Marble Processing: A British Industry — Marble Substitutes and Imitations — Practical Considerations for Architects — Tips on Choosing Marble — List of Commonly Used Marbles, with Descriptive Notes and Examples of Their Applications..
MENSURATION AND GAUGING. A POCKET-BOOK containing Tables, Rules, and Memoranda for Revenue Officers, Brewers, Spirit Merchants, &c. By J. B. Mant. Second Edition. 18mo, leather. 4/0
MENSURATION AND GAUGING. A POCKET-BOOK with Tables, Rules, and Notes for Revenue Officers, Brewers, Spirit Merchants, etc. By J. B. Mant. Second Edition. 18mo, leather. 4/0
"Should be in the hands of every practical brewer." —Brewers' Journal.
"Every practical brewer should have this." —Brewers' Journal.
METRIC TABLES, A SERIES OF. In which the British Standard Measures and Weights are compared with those of the Metric System at present in Use on the Continent. By C. H. Dowling, C.E. 8vo, cloth 10/6
METRIC TABLES, A SERIES OF. In which the British Standard Measures and Weights are compared with those of the Metric System currently in use on the Continent. By C. H. Dowling, C.E. 8vo, cloth 10/6
"Mr. Dowling's tables are well put together as a ready-reckoner for the conversion of one system into the other." —Athenæum.
"Mr. Dowling's tables are well organized as a quick guide for converting from one system to another." —Athenæum.
METROLOGY, MODERN. A Manual of the Metrical Units and Systems of the present Century. With an Appendix containing a proposed English System. By Lowis d'A. Jackson, A.M.Inst.C.E., Author of "Aid to Survey Practice," etc. Large crown 8vo, cloth 12/6
MODERN METROLOGY. A Guide to the Metric Units and Systems of the Current Century. Includes an Appendix with a suggested English System. By Lowis d'A. Jackson, A.M.Inst.C.E., Author of "Aid to Survey Practice," etc. Large crown 8vo, cloth 12/6
"We recommend the work to all interested in the practical reform of our weights and measures." —Nature.
"We recommend this work to everyone interested in the practical reform of our weights and measures." —Nature.
MOTOR CAR, THE. A Practical Manual for the use of Students and Motor Car Owners, with notes on the Internal Combustion Engine and its fuel. By Robert W. A. Brewer, A.M.Inst.C.E., M.I.M.E., M.I.A.E. 250 pages. With numerous illustrations. Demy 8vo, cloth Net 5/0
MOTOR CAR, THE. A Practical Manual for Students and Car Owners, including insights on the Internal Combustion Engine and its fuel. By Robert W. A. Brewer, A.M.Inst.C.E., M.I.M.E., M.I.A.E. 250 pages. With many illustrations. Demy 8vo, cloth Network 5/0
MOTOR CAR CATECHISM. Containing about 320 Questions and Answers Explaining the Construction and Working of a Modern Motor Car. For the Use of Owners, Drivers, and Students. By John Henry Knight. Second Edition, revised and enlarged, with an additional chapter on Motor Cycles. Crown 8vo, with Illustrations Net 1/6
MOTOR CAR CATECHISM. Featuring around 320 Questions and Answers Explaining How a Modern Motor Car is Built and Operates. For the Benefit of Owners, Drivers, and Students. By John Henry Knight. Second Edition, revised and expanded, with a new chapter on Motorcycles. Crown 8vo, with Illustrations Net 1/6
The Petrol Engine—Transmission and the Chassis—Tyres—Duties of a Car Driver—Motor Cycles—Laws and Regulations.
The Gasoline Engine—Transmission and Frame—Tires—Driver Responsibilities—Motorcycles—Laws and Regulations.
MOTOR VEHICLES FOR BUSINESS PURPOSES. A Practical Handbook for those interested in the Transport of Passengers and Goods. By A. J. Wallis-Tayler, A.M.Inst.C.E. With 134 Illustrations. Demy 8vo, cloth Net 9/0
MOTOR VEHICLES FOR BUSINESS PURPOSES. A Practical Handbook for anyone interested in the transport of passengers and goods. By A. J. Wallis-Taylor, A.M.Inst.C.E. With 134 illustrations. Demy 8vo, cloth Net 9-0
Resistance to Traction on Common Roads — Power Required for Motor Vehicles — Light Passenger Vehicles — Heavy Passenger Vehicles — Light Goods Vans — Heavy Freight Vehicles — Self-Propelled Vehicles for Municipal Purposes — Miscellaneous Types of Motor Vehicles — Cost of Running and Maintenance.
Resistance to Traction on Common Roads — Power Needed for Motor Vehicles — Light Passenger Vehicles — Heavy Passenger Vehicles — Light Goods Vans — Heavy Freight Vehicles — Self-Propelled Vehicles for Municipal Use — Various Types of Motor Vehicles — Operating and Maintenance Costs.
OILS AND ALLIED SUBSTANCES. AN ANALYSIS. By A. C. Wright, M.A.Oxon., B.Sc.Lond., formerly Assistant Lecturer in Chemistry at the Yorkshire College, Leeds, and Lecturer in Chemistry at the Hull Technical School. Demy 8vo, cloth Net 9/0
OILS AND ALLIED SUBSTANCES. AN ANALYSIS. By A. C. Wright, M.A.Oxon., B.Sc.Lond., previously Assistant Lecturer in Chemistry at Yorkshire College, Leeds, and Lecturer in Chemistry at Hull Technical School. Demy 8vo, cloth Net 9/0
The Occurrence and Composition of Oils, Fats and Waxes — The Physical Properties of Oils, Fats, and Waxes, and their Determination — The Chemical Properties of Oils, Fats, and Waxes from the Analytical Standpoint — Detection and Determination of Non-Fatty Constituents — Methods for Estimating the Constituents of Oils and Fats — Description and Properties of the more Important Oils, Fats, and Waxes, with the Methods for their Investigation — Examination of Certain Commercial Products.
The Presence and Composition of Oils, Fats, and Waxes — The Physical Properties of Oils, Fats, and Waxes, and How to Assess Them — The Chemical Properties of Oils, Fats, and Waxes from an Analytical Perspective — Identifying and Measuring Non-Fat Components — Methods for Estimating the Components of Oils and Fats — Overview and Features of Key Oils, Fats, and Waxes, Including Analysis Methods — Review of Specific Commercial Products.
ORGAN BUILDING (PRACTICAL). By W. E. Dickson, M.A., Precentor of Ely Cathedral. Second Edition, Crown 8vo 2/6
ORGAN BUILDING (PRACTICAL). By W. E. Dickson, M.A., Precentor of Ely Cathedral. Second Edition, Crown 8vo £2.50
PAINTS, MIXED. THEIR CHEMISTRY AND TECHNOLOGY. By Maximilian Toch. With 60 Photomicrographic Plates and other Illustrations Net 12/6
PAINTS, MIXED. THEIR CHEMISTRY AND TECHNOLOGY. By Maximilian Touch. With 60 Photomicrographic Plates and other Illustrations Net 12/6
The Pigments — Yellow, Blue, and Green Pigments — The Inert Fillers and Extenders — Paint Vehicles — Special Paints — Analytical — Appendix.
The Pigments — Yellow, Blue, and Green Pigments — Inactive Fillers and Extenders — Paint Carriers — Specialty Paints — Analysis — Appendix.
PAINTING FOR THE IMITATION OF WOODS AND MARBLES. As Taught and Practised by A. R. Van der Burg and P. Van der Burg, Directors of the Rotterdam Painting Institution. Royal folio, cloth, 18½ by 12½ in. Illustrated with 24 full-size Coloured Plates; also 12 Plain Plates, comprising 154 Figures. Fifth Edition Net 25/0
PAINTING TO IMITATE WOODS AND MARBLES. As Taught and Practiced by A. R. Van der Burg and P. Van der Burg, Directors of the Rotterdam Painting Institution. Royal folio, cloth, 18½ by 12½ in. Illustrated with 24 full-size colored plates; also 12 plain plates, featuring 154 figures. Fifth Edition Net 25-0
PAINTING, GRAINING, MARBLING, AND SIGN WRITING. With a Course of Elementary Drawing and a Collection of Useful Receipts. By E. A. Davidson. Ninth Edition. Coloured Plates. Crown 8vo, cloth, 5/0; cloth boards, 6/0
PAINTING, GRAINING, MARBLING, AND SIGN WRITING. With a Course of Elementary Drawing and a Collection of Useful Tips. By E. A. Davidson. Ninth Edition. Colored Plates. Crown 8vo, cloth, 5/0; cloth boards, 6/0
PAPER-MAKING. A Practical Manual for Paper Makers and Owners and Managers of Paper-Mills. With Tables, Calculations, etc. By G. Clapperton, Paper-Maker. With Illustrations of Fibres from Micro-Photographs. Second edition, revised and enlarged. Crown 8vo, cloth Net 5/0
PAPER-MAKING. A Practical Guide for Paper Makers and Owners and Managers of Paper Mills. Featuring Tables, Calculations, and more. By G. Clapperton, Paper Maker. With Illustrations of Fibers from Micro-Photographs. Second edition, revised and expanded. Crown 8vo, cloth Net 5-0
Chemical and Physical Characteristics of Various Fibres — Cutting and Boiling of Rags — Jute Boiling and Bleaching — Wet Picking — Washing, Breaking, and Bleaching — Electrolytic Bleaching — Antichlor — Cellulose from Wood — Mechanical Wood Pulp — Esparto and Straw — Beating — Loading — Starching — Colouring Matter — Resin, Size, and Sizing — The Fourdrinier Machine and its Management — Animal Sizing — Drying — Glazing and Burnishing — Cutting, Finishing — Microscopical Examination of Paper — Tests for Ingredients of Paper — Recovery of Soda — Testing of Chemicals — Testing Water for Impurities.
Chemical and Physical Properties of Different Fibers — Cutting and Boiling Rags — Jute Boiling and Bleaching — Wet Picking — Washing, Breaking, and Bleaching — Electrolytic Bleaching — Antichlor — Cellulose from Wood — Mechanical Wood Pulp — Esparto and Straw — Beating — Loading — Starching — Coloring Agents — Resin, Size, and Sizing — The Fourdrinier Machine and Its Operation — Animal Sizing — Drying — Glazing and Burnishing — Cutting, Finishing — Microscopic Analysis of Paper — Tests for Paper Ingredients — Recovery of Soda — Chemical Testing — Testing Water for Impurities.
"The author caters for the requirements of responsible mill hands, apprentices, etc., whilst his manual will be found of great service to students of technology, as well as to veteran paper-makers and mill-owners. The illustrations form an excellent feature." —The World's Paper Trade.
"The author meets the needs of responsible mill workers, apprentices, and others, while his manual will be incredibly helpful for technology students, as well as experienced paper-makers and mill owners. The illustrations are a standout feature." —The World's Paper Trade.
PAPER-MAKING. A Practical Handbook of the Manufacture of Paper from Rags, Esparto, Straw, and other Fibrous Materials. Including the Manufacture of Pulp from Wood Fibre, with a Description of the Machinery and Appliances used. To which are added Details of Processes for Recovering Soda from Waste Liquors. By A. Watt. With Illustrations. Crown 8vo 7/6
PAPER-MAKING. A Practical Handbook on How to Make Paper from Rags, Esparto, Straw, and Other Fibrous Materials. It covers the production of pulp from wood fibers, along with descriptions of the machinery and tools used. Additionally, it includes details on processes for recovering soda from waste liquids. By A. Watt. With Illustrations. Crown 8vo 7/6
PAPER MAKING, CHAPTERS ON. A Series of Volumes dealing in a practical manner with all the leading questions in connection with the Chemistry of Paper-Making and the Manufacture of Paper. By Clayton Beadle, Lecturer on Paper-Making before the Society of Arts, 1898 and 1902, and at the Battersea Polytechnic Institute, 1902, etc., etc. Each volume is published separately, at the price of 5/0 net per vol.
PAPER MAKING, CHAPTERS ON. A series of volumes that practically address all the main issues related to the Chemistry of Paper-Making and the Production of Paper. By Clayton Beadle, Lecturer on Paper-Making at the Society of Arts, 1898 and 1902, and at the Battersea Polytechnic Institute, 1902, etc., etc. Each volume is published individually, priced at 5/0 net per vol.
Volume I, comprises a Series of Lectures delivered on behalf of the Battersea Polytechnic Institute in 1902. Crown 8vo. 151 pp. Net 5/0
Volume I includes a series of lectures given on behalf of the Battersea Polytechnic Institute in 1902. Crown 8vo. 151 pp. Net 5-0
Volume II. comprises Answers to Questions on Paper-Making Set by the Examiners to the City and Guilds of London Institute, 1901-1903. Crown 8vo, 182 pp. Net 5/0
Volume II. contains Answers to Questions on Paper-Making posed by the Examiners of the City and Guilds of London Institute, 1901-1903. Crown 8vo, 182 pp. Net 5-0
Volume III. comprises a short practical Treatise in which Boiling, Bleaching, Loading, Colouring, and similar Questions are discussed. Crown 8vo, 142 pp. Net 5/0
Volume III. includes a brief practical guide where boiling, bleaching, loading, coloring, and similar topics are covered. Crown 8vo, 142 pp. Net 5-0
CONTENTS: — "Brass" and "Steel" Beater Bars — The Size and Speed of Beater Rolls — The Fading of Prussian Blue Papers — The Effect of Lowering the Breast Roll — The Effect of "Loading" on the Transparency of Paper — "Terra Alba" as a Loading for Paper — The Use of Alum in Tub Sizing — The Influence of Temperature on Bleaching — The Use of Refining Engines — Agitation as an Auxiliary to Bleaching — The Heating of "Stuff" for the Paper Machine — The Comparative Results of Quadruple and Open Effect Evaporation — How to Prevent Electrification of Paper on the Machine — Transparency of Papers — The "Life" of Machine Wires — Edge Runners.
CONTENTS: — "Brass" and "Steel" Beater Bars — The Size and Speed of Beater Rolls — The Fading of Prussian Blue Papers — The Impact of Lowering the Breast Roll — The Impact of "Loading" on Paper Transparency — "Terra Alba" as a Loading Agent for Paper — The Use of Alum in Tub Sizing — The Effect of Temperature on Bleaching — The Use of Refining Engines — Agitation as a Support for Bleaching — Heating "Stuff" for the Paper Machine — Comparing Results of Quadruple and Open Effect Evaporation — How to Prevent Electrification of Paper on the Machine — Transparency of Papers — The "Life" of Machine Wires — Edge Runners.
Volume IV. contains discussions upon Water Supplies and the Management of the Paper Machine and its influence upon the Qualities of Papers. Crown 8vo, 164 pp. Net 5/0
Volume IV. contains discussions on Water Supplies and the Management of the Paper Machine and its impact on the Quality of Papers. Crown 8vo, 164 pp. Net 5-0
CONTENTS: — The Bulking of Papers — Special Qualities of "Art" Papers — The "Ageing" and Storage of Papers — The Use of Lime in Boiling — Controlling the Mark of The "Dandy" — "Machine" and "Hand" Cut Rags — Froth on Paper Machine — Scum Spots in Paper — Consumption of Water in the Manufacture of Paper — The Management of Suction-boxes — The Shrinkage of Paper on the Machine — Paper that does not Shrink or Expand — The Production of Non-Stretchable Paper — The Connection between "Stretch" and "Expansion" of Papers — "Stretch" and "Breaking Strain" — Paper Testing Machines.
CONTENTS: — The Making of Paper — Unique Features of "Art" Papers — The "Aging" and Storage of Paper — Using Lime in Boiling — Controlling the Mark of The "Dandy" — "Machine" and "Hand" Cut Rags — Foam on the Paper Machine — Scum Spots in Paper — Water Usage in Paper Production — Controlling Suction Boxes — Paper Shrinkage on the Machine — Paper That Doesn't Shrink or Expand — Creating Non-Stretchable Paper — The Connection Between "Stretch" and "Expansion" of Papers — "Stretch" and "Breaking Strain" — Paper Testing Machines.
Volume V. concerning The Theory and Practice of Beating. Crown 8vo. With photomicrographs and other Illustrations. Net 5/0
Volume V. about The Theory and Practice of Beating. Crown 8vo. With photomicrographs and other Illustrations. Net 5-0
CONTENTS: — Early Beating Appliances — The Hollander — The Economy of Beating — Difficulties of arriving at Definite Results — Behaviour of different Fibres — "Refining" — Power Consumption — A Comparison of Two different kinds of Beaters — Power consumed in the "Breaking," "Beating," and "Refining" of different Materials — Dealing with the "Circulation" and "Agitation" in a Hollander — Comparisons of large and medium-sized Hollanders when beating "Hard" and "Soft" Stock — Trials to determine the Relative Merits of Stone and Metal Beater-Bars — Trials with Breakers, Reed Beaters, and Kingsland Refiners — A System of Beating combined with a System for Continuous Bleaching — Beaters and Refiners — Power consumed in grinding Wood-pulp — The Reduction in Length of Fibres at different Stages of Beating — Method for determining the "Wetness" of Beaten Stuff — The Position of Beaters in Old and Modern Paper-Mills — Appendix.
CONTENTS: — Early Beating Equipment — The Hollander — Beating Efficiency — Challenges in Achieving Accurate Results — Behavior of Different Fibers — "Refining" — Energy Consumption — Comparing Two Types of Beaters — Energy Used in "Breaking," "Beating," and "Refining" Various Materials — Managing "Circulation" and "Agitation" in a Hollander — Comparisons of Large and Medium-Sized Hollanders for "Hard" and "Soft" Stock — Tests to Assess the Relative Benefits of Stone and Metal Beater-Bars — Tests with Breakers, Reed Beaters, and Kingsland Refiners — A Beating System Integrated with a Continuous Bleaching System — Beaters and Refiners — Energy Used in Grinding Wood Pulp — Reduction in Fiber Length at Different Beating Stages — Method for Measuring the "Wetness" of Beaten Material — Beater Placement in Old and Modern Paper Mills — Appendix.
PARA RUBBER. ITS CULTIVATION & PREPARATION. By W. H. Johnson, F.L.S., Ex-Director of Agriculture, Gold Coast Colony, West Africa, Director of Agriculture, Mozambique Company, East Africa, Commissioned by Government in 1902 to visit Ceylon to Study the Methods employed there in the Cultivation and Preparation of Para Rubber and other Agricultural Staples for Market, with a view to Introduce them into West Africa. Second Edition, rewritten and greatly enlarged, with numerous illustrations. Demy 8vo, cloth Net 7/6
PARA RUBBER. ITS CULTIVATION & PREPARATION. By W. H. Johnson, F.L.S., Former Director of Agriculture, Gold Coast Colony, West Africa, Director of Agriculture, Mozambique Company, East Africa, Commissioned by the Government in 1902 to visit Ceylon to study the methods used there in the cultivation and preparation of Para Rubber and other agricultural staples for market, aiming to introduce them into West Africa. Second Edition, rewritten and significantly expanded, with numerous illustrations. Demy 8vo, cloth Net 7.6
The World's Production and Consumption of Rubber — The Para Rubber Tree at Home and Abroad — Propagation — Planting and Cultivating — Soils and Manures — Pests — Latex — Collecting the Latex — Rubber Manufacture — The Antisepticisation of Rubber — Drying and Packing Rubber for Export — Yield of Para Rubber from Cultivated Trees — Establishment and Maintenance of a Para Rubber Plantation — Commercial Value of the Oil in Hevea Seeds.
The Global Production and Use of Rubber — The Para Rubber Tree at Home and Overseas — Growing — Planting and Cultivating — Soil and Fertilizers — Pests — Latex — Harvesting Latex — Rubber Production — Sterilization of Rubber — Drying and Packaging Rubber for Export — Yield of Para Rubber from Cultivated Trees — Establishing and Maintaining a Para Rubber Plantation — Commercial Value of the Oil in Hevea Seeds.
PASTRYCOOK AND CONFECTIONER'S GUIDE. For Hotels, Restaurants, and the Trade in general, adapted also for Family Use. By R. Wells, Author of "The Bread and Biscuit Baker" 1/0
PASTRY COOK AND CONFECTIONER'S GUIDE. For Hotels, Restaurants, and the Trade in general, also suitable for Family Use. By R. Wells, Author of "The Bread and Biscuit Baker" 1/0
PETROL AIR GAS. A Practical Handbook on the Installation and Working of Air Gas Lighting Systems for Country Houses. By Henry O'Connor, F.R.S.E., A.M. Inst. C.E., &c., author of "The Gas Engineer's Pocket Book." 80 pages with illustrations. Crown 8vo, cloth Net 1/6
PETROL AIR GAS. A Practical Handbook on Installing and Operating Air Gas Lighting Systems for Country Homes. By Henry O'Connor, F.R.S.E., A.M. Inst. C.E., etc., author of "The Gas Engineer's Pocket Book." 80 pages with illustrations. Crown 8vo, cloth Network 1/6
Description of Previous Plants and Systems for Country-House Lighting, Difficulties with, Objections and Prices — History of Petrol Gas, Comparative Costs — Petrol, its Nature, Dangers, and Storing, Notes on the Law regarding same — Burners, Description of same, Piping, Mantles — General Principles of Parts of Plants — Motive Power Meters — Weight-Driven Plants — Root's Blowers — Hot-Air Engines — Pelton Water-Wheels — Descriptions of Various Plants — Extract from an Act for the Safe-Keeping of Petroleum and Other Substances of a Like Nature — Appendix — Useful Notes.
Overview of Previous Lighting Systems for Country Houses, Challenges, Concerns, and Pricing — History of Gasoline Gas, Cost Comparisons — Gasoline, Its Properties, Risks, and Storage, Legal Considerations — Burners, Their Descriptions, Piping, Mantles — Key Principles of Plant Components — Power Meters — Weight-Driven Systems — Root's Blowers — Hot-Air Engines — Pelton Water Wheels — Descriptions of Different Systems — Excerpt from Legislation on the Safe Storage of Petroleum and Similar Substances — Appendix — Helpful Notes.
PETROLEUM. THE OIL FIELDS OF RUSSIA AND THE RUSSIAN PETROLEUM INDUSTRY. A Practical Handbook on the Exploration, Exploitation, and Management of Russian Oil Properties, the Origin of Petroleum in Russia, the Theory and Practice of Liquid Fuel. By A. B. Thompson, A.M.I.M.E., F.G.S. 415 pp., with numerous Illustrations and Photographic Plates. Second Edition Revised. Super-royal 8vo, cloth Net 21/0
PETROLEUM. THE OIL FIELDS OF RUSSIA AND THE RUSSIAN PETROLEUM INDUSTRY. A Practical Handbook on the Exploration, Exploitation, and Management of Russian Oil Properties, the Origin of Petroleum in Russia, the Theory and Practice of Liquid Fuel. By A. B. Thompson, A.M.I.M.E., F.G.S. 415 pp., with numerous Illustrations and Photographic Plates. Second Edition Revised. Super-royal 8vo, cloth Net 21/0
PETROLEUM MINING AND OIL-FIELD DEVELOPMENT. A Guide to the Exploration of Petroleum Lands, and a Study of the Engineering Problems connected with the Winning of Petroleum. Including Statistical Data of important Oil Fields. Notes on the Origin and Distribution of Petroleum, and a description of the Methods of Utilizing Oil and Gas Fuels. By A. Beeby Thompson, A.M.I.Mech.E., F.G.S. Author of "The Oil Fields of Russia." 384 pages, 114 illustrations, including 22 full-page plates. Demy 8vo, cloth. [Just Published.] Net 15/0
PETROLEUM MINING AND OIL-FIELD DEVELOPMENT. A Guide to Exploring Petroleum Lands and a Study of the Engineering Challenges Involved in Extracting Petroleum. This includes Statistical Data on Important Oil Fields, Notes on the Origin and Distribution of Petroleum, and a Description of Methods for Utilizing Oil and Gas Fuels. By A. Beeby Thompson, A.M.I.Mech.E., F.G.S. Author of "The Oil Fields of Russia." 384 pages, 114 illustrations, including 22 full-page plates. Demy 8vo, cloth. [Just Published.] Net 15/0
"It is an admirable text-book by a competent authority on an interesting subject." —Mining Magazine.
"It’s a great textbook by an expert on a fascinating topic." —Mining Magazine.
"The present effort is likely to receive a warm welcome in engineering circles, and it can be cordially commended for perusal. It will doubtless have that large sale to which its merits entitle it." —Mining World.
"The current effort is expected to be well-received in engineering circles, and it comes highly recommended for review. It will certainly achieve the significant sales that its qualities justify." —Mining World.
"The general aspects of the Petroleum Industry are fully and ably laid out." —Engineer.
"The overall aspects of the Petroleum Industry are thoroughly and competently presented." —Engineer.
PIGMENTS, ARTISTS' MANUAL OF. Showing their Composition, Conditions of Permanency, Non-Permanency, and Adulterations, etc., with Tests of Purity. By H. C. Standage. Third Edition. Crown 8vo, cloth 2/6
PIGMENTS, ARTISTS' MANUAL OF. Showing their Composition, Conditions of Permanency, Non-Permanency, and Adulterations, etc., with Tests of Purity. By H. C. Standage. Third Edition. Crown 8vo, cloth 2/6
PORTLAND CEMENT, THE MODERN MANUFACTURE OF. By Percy C. H. West, Chemical Engineer and Consulting Chemist. In Three Volumes. Vol. I., dealing with "Machinery and Kilns." About 200 pages, Medium 8vo. With numerous Illustrations. [Nearly ready, price about] 10/6
PORTLAND CEMENT, THE MODERN MANUFACTURE OF. By Percy C. H. West, Chemical Engineer and Consulting Chemist. In Three Volumes. Vol. I., focused on "Machinery and Kilns." About 200 pages, Medium 8vo. With numerous Illustrations. Almost ready, price around 10/6
PRODUCER GAS PRACTICE (AMERICAN) AND INDUSTRIAL GAS ENGINEERING. By Nisbet Latta, M.Amer.Soc.M.E., M.Amer.Gas Inst. 558 pages, with 247 illustrations. Demy 4to, cloth [Just Published.] Net 25/-
PRODUCER GAS PRACTICE (AMERICAN) AND INDUSTRIAL GAS ENGINEERING. By Nisbet Latta, M.Amer.Soc.M.E., M.Amer.Gas Inst. 558 pages, with 247 illustrations. Demy 4to, cloth [Just Published.] Net $25
Producer Operation—Cleaning the Gas—Works Details—Producer Types—Moving Gases—Solid Fuels—Physical Properties of Gases—Chemical Properties of Gases—Gas Analysis—Gas Power—Gas Engines—Industrial Gas Applications—Furnaces and Kilns—Burning Lime and Cement—Pre-Heating Air—Doherty Combustion Economiser—Combustion in Furnaces—Heat: Temperature, Radiation and Conduction—Heat Measurements: Pyrometry and Calorimetry—Pipes, Flues, and Chimneys—Materials: Fire Clay, Masonry, Weights and Rope—Useful Tables—Oil Fuel Producer Gas.
Producer Operations—Gas Cleaning—Work Details—Types of Producers—Gas Movement—Solid Fuels—Physical Properties of Gases—Chemical Properties of Gases—Gas Analysis—Gas Power—Gas Engines—Industrial Applications of Gas—Furnaces and Kilns—Lime and Cement Burning—Air Pre-Heating—Doherty Combustion Economizer—Combustion in Furnaces—Heat: Temperature, Radiation, and Conduction—Heat Measurement: Pyrometry and Calorimetry—Pipes, Flues, and Chimneys—Materials: Fire Clay, Masonry, Weights, and Rope—Useful Tables—Oil Fuel Producer Gas.
RECIPES, FORMULAS AND PROCESSES, TWENTIETH CENTURY BOOK OF. Edited by Gardner D. Hiscox, M.E. Nearly 10,000 Scientific, Chemical, Technical, and Household Recipes, Formulas and Processes for Use in the Laboratory and the Office, the Workshop and the Home. Medium 8vo, 800 pp., cloth. Net 12/6
RECIPES, FORMULAS AND PROCESSES, TWENTIETH CENTURY BOOK. Edited by Gardner D. Hiscox, M.E. Nearly 10,000 scientific, chemical, technical, and household recipes, formulas, and processes for use in the lab and the office, the workshop, and at home. Medium 8vo, 800 pp., cloth. Net 12/6
Selected List of Contents: — Absinthe — Acid Proofing — Adhesives — Alcohol — Alkali — Alloys — Aluminium — Ammonia — Aniline — Antidotes for Poison — Anchovy Preparations — Antiseptics — Antiques — Baking powders — Barometers — Beverages — Bleaching — Brass — Brick — Carbolic Acids — Casting — Celluloid — Cheese — Ceramics — Cigars — Coffee — Condiments — Copper — Cosmetics — Cotton — Diamond Tests — Donarite — Dyes — Electro Plating — Embalming — Enamelling — Engraving — Essences — Explosives — Fertilisers — Filters — Food Adulterants — Gelatine — Glass — Gold — Gums — Harness Dressings — Horn — Inks — Insecticides — Iron — Ivory — Jewellers' Formulas — Lacquers — Laundry Preparations — Leather — Linoleum — Lubricants — Matches — Metals — Music Boxes — Oils — Paints — Paper — Perfumes — Petroleum — Photography — Plaster — Plating — Polishes — Porcelain — Poultry — Putty — Rat Poisons — Refrigeration — Ropes — Rubber — Rust Preventives — Salt — Screws — Silk — Silver — Soaps — Solders — Spirit — Sponges — Steel — Stone — Thermometers — Tin — Valves — Varnishes — Veterinary Formulas — Watchmakers' Formulas — Waterproofing — Wax — Weights and Measures — Whitewash — Wood — Yeast.
Selected List of Contents: — Absinthe — Acid Proofing — Adhesives — Alcohol — Alkali — Alloys — Aluminum — Ammonia — Aniline — Antidotes for Poison — Anchovy Preparations — Antiseptics — Antiques — Baking Powders — Barometers — Beverages — Bleaching — Brass — Brick — Carbolic Acids — Casting — Celluloid — Cheese — Ceramics — Cigars — Coffee — Condiments — Copper — Cosmetics — Cotton — Diamond Tests — Donarite — Dyes — Electro Plating — Embalming — Enameling — Engraving — Essences — Explosives — Fertilizers — Filters — Food Adulterants — Gelatin — Glass — Gold — Gums — Harness Dressings — Horn — Inks — Insecticides — Iron — Ivory — Jewelers' Formulas — Lacquers — Laundry Preparations — Leather — Linoleum — Lubricants — Matches — Metals — Music Boxes — Oils — Paints — Paper — Perfumes — Petroleum — Photography — Plaster — Plating — Polishes — Porcelain — Poultry — Putty — Rat Poisons — Refrigeration — Ropes — Rubber — Rust Preventives — Salt — Screws — Silk — Silver — Soaps — Solders — Spirit — Sponges — Steel — Stone — Thermometers — Tin — Valves — Varnishes — Veterinary Formulas — Watchmakers' Formulas — Waterproofing — Wax — Weights and Measures — Whitewash — Wood — Yeast.
RUBBER HAND STAMPS. And the Manipulation of Rubber. A Practical Treatise on the Manufacture of Indiarubber Hand Stamps, Small Articles of Indiarubber, The Hektograph, Special Inks, Cements, and Allied Subjects. By T. O'Conor Sloane A.M., Ph.D. With numerous Illustrations. Square 8vo, cloth 5/0
RUBBER HAND STAMPS. And the Use of Rubber. A Practical Guide to Making Rubber Hand Stamps, Small Rubber Products, The Hektograph, Special Inks, Adhesives, and Related Topics. By T. O'Conor Sloane A.M., Ph.D. With many Illustrations. Square 8vo, cloth 5/0
SAVOURIES AND SWEETS. Suitable for Luncheons and Dinners. By Miss M.
L. Allen (Mrs. A. Macaire), Author of "Breakfast Dishes," etc.
Thirty-first Edition. F'cap 8vo, sewed 1/0
Or, quarter bound, fancy boards 1/6
SAVORIES AND SWEETS. Perfect for Lunches and Dinners. By Miss M.L. Allen (Mrs. A. Macaire), Author of "Breakfast Dishes," etc.
Thirty-first Edition. F'cap 8vo, sewed 1/0
Or, quarter-bound, fancy boards 1/6
SHEET METAL-WORKER'S GUIDE. A Practical Handbook for Tinsmiths, Coppersmiths, Zincworkers, &c., with 46 Diagrams and Working Patterns. By W. J. E. Crane. Crown 8vo, Cloth 1/6
SHEET METAL WORKER'S GUIDE. A Practical Handbook for Tinsmiths, Coppersmiths, Zincworkers, etc., with 46 Diagrams and Working Patterns. By W. J. E. Crane. Crown 8vo, Cloth 1/6
SHEET METAL-WORKER'S INSTRUCTOR. Comprising Geometrical Problems and Practical Rules for Describing the Various Patterns Required by Zinc, Sheet-Iron, Copper, and Tin-Plate Workers. By R. H. Warn. Third Edition. Revised and Further Enlarged by J. G. Horner, A.M.I.M.E. Crown 8vo, 280 pp., with 465 Illustrations, cloth 7/6
SHEET METAL WORKER'S INSTRUCTOR. Including Geometrical Problems and Practical Guidelines for Creating the Various Patterns Needed by Zinc, Sheet Metal, Copper, and Tin Plate Workers. By R. H. Alert. Third Edition. Updated and Further Expanded by J. G. Horner, A.M.I.M.E. Crown 8vo, 280 pages, with 465 Illustrations, cloth 7/6
SILVERSMITH'S HANDBOOK. Alloying and Working of Silver, Refining and Melting, Solders, Imitation Alloys, Manipulation, Prevention of Waste, Improving and Finishing the Surface of the Work, etc. By George E. Gee. Fourth Edition Revised, Crown 8vo, cloth 3/0
SILVERSMITH'S HANDBOOK. Alloying and working with silver, refining and melting, solders, imitation alloys, manipulation, preventing waste, enhancing and finishing the surface of the work, etc. By George E. Gee. Fourth Edition Revised, Crown 8vo, cloth 3/0
SOAP-MAKING. A Practical Handbook of the Manufacture of Hard and Soft Soaps, Toilet Soaps, etc. With a Chapter on the Recovery of Glycerine from Waste Leys. By Alexander Watt. Seventh Edition, including an Appendix on Modern Candlemaking. Crown 8vo, cloth 7/6
SOAP-MAKING. A Practical Handbook for Making Hard and Soft Soaps, Toilet Soaps, and More. Includes a Chapter on Recovering Glycerine from Waste Leys. By Alexander Watt. Seventh Edition, featuring an Appendix on Modern Candlemaking. Crown 8vo, cloth 7/6
"The work will prove very useful, not merely to the technological student, but to the soap boiler who wishes to understand the theory of his art." —Chemical News.
"The work will be really helpful, not only for the tech student but also for the soap maker who wants to grasp the theory behind his craft." —Chemical News.
SOAPS, CANDLES, and GLYCERINE. A Practical Manual of Modern Methods of Utilisation of Fats and Oils in the Manufacture of Soap and Candles, and of the recovery of Glycerine. By L. L. Lamborn, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, M.Am.C.S. Medium 8vo, cloth. Fully Illustrated. 706 pages Net 30/0
SOAPS, CANDLES, and GLYCERINE. A Practical Guide to Modern Methods for Using Fats and Oils in Soap and Candle Making, and for Recovering Glycerine. By L. L. Lamborn, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, M.Am.C.S. Medium 8vo, cloth. Fully Illustrated. 706 pages Net 30 days
The Soap Industry — Raw Materials — Bleaching and Purification of Soap-stock — The Chemical Characteristics of Soap-stock and their Behaviour towards Saponifying Agents — Mechanical Equivalent of the Soap Factory — Cold Process and Semi-boiled Soap — Grained Soap — Settled Rosin Soap — Milled Soap-base — Floating Soap — Shaving Soap — Medicated Soap — Essential Oils and Soap Perfumery — Milled Soap — Candles — Glycerine — Examination of Raw Materials and Factory Products.
The Soap Industry — Raw Materials — Bleaching and Purification of Soapstock — The Chemical Properties of Soapstock and Their Interaction with Saponifying Agents — Mechanical Equivalent of the Soap Factory — Cold Process and Semi-Boiled Soap — Grained Soap — Settled Rosin Soap — Milled Soap Base — Floating Soap — Shaving Soap — Medicated Soap — Essential Oils and Soap Fragrance — Milled Soap — Candles — Glycerin — Analysis of Raw Materials and Factory Products.
SOLUBILITIES OF INORGANIC AND ORGANIC SUBSTANCES. A Hand-book of the most Reliable Quantitative Solubility Determinations. Recalculated and Compiled by Atherton Seidell, Ph.D., Chemist, Hygienic Laboratory, U. S. Public Health Service, Washington, D C. Medium 8vo, cloth, 377 pages Net 12/6
SOLUBILITIES OF INORGANIC AND ORGANIC SUBSTANCES. A Handbook of the Most Reliable Quantitative Solubility Determinations. Recalculated and Compiled by Atherton Seidell, Ph.D., Chemist, Hygienic Laboratory, U.S. Public Health Service, Washington, D.C. Medium 8vo, cloth, 377 pages Net 12/6
TEA MACHINERY AND TEA FACTORIES. Describing the Mechanical Appliances required in the Cultivation and Preparation of Tea for the Market. By A. J. Wallis-Tayler, A.M.Inst.C.E. Medium 8vo, 468 pp. With 218 Illustrations Net 25/0
TEA MACHINERY AND TEA FACTORIES. Describing the Mechanical Equipment needed for Growing and Preparing Tea for Sale. By A. J. Wallis-Taylor, A.M.Inst.C.E. Medium 8vo, 468 pages. With 218 Illustrations Net 25/0
"The subject of tea machinery is now one of the first interest to a large class of people, to whom we strongly commend the volume." —Chamber of Commerce Journal.
"The topic of tea machinery is now of primary interest to a large group of people, to whom we highly recommend this book." —Chamber of Commerce Journal.
WAGES TABLES. At 54, 52, 50, and 48 Hours per Week. Showing the Amounts of Wages from one quarter of an hour to sixty-four hours, in each case at Rates of Wages advancing by One Shilling from 4s. to 55s. per week. By Thos. Carbutt, Accountant. Square crown, 8vo, half-bound 6/0
WAGES TABLES. For 54, 52, 50, and 48 Hours per Week. Displaying the Amounts of Wages from fifteen minutes to sixty-four hours, each calculated at Rates of Wages increasing by One Shilling from 4s. to 55s. per week. By Thos. Carbutt, Accountant. Square crown, 8vo, half-bound 6-0
WATCH REPAIRING, CLEANING, AND ADJUSTING. A Practical Handbook dealing with the Materials and Tools Used, and the Methods of Repairing, Cleaning, Altering, and Adjusting all kinds of English and Foreign Watches, Repeaters, Chronographs, and Marine Chronometers. By F. J. Garrard, Springer and Adjuster of Marine Chronometers and Deck Watches for the Admiralty. Second Edition. Revised. With over 200 Illustrations. Crown 8vo, cloth Net 4/6
WATCH REPAIR, CLEANING, AND ADJUSTING. A Practical Handbook covering the Materials and Tools Used, and the Techniques for Repairing, Cleaning, Modifying, and Adjusting all types of English and Foreign Watches, Repeaters, Chronographs, and Marine Chronometers. By F. J. Garrard, Spring Maker and Adjuster of Marine Chronometers and Deck Watches for the Admiralty. Second Edition. Revised. Featuring over 200 Illustrations. Crown 8vo, cloth Net 4 out of 6
WATCHES AND OTHER TIMEKEEPERS, HISTORY OF. By J. F. Kendal, M.B.H. Inst. 1/6 boards; or cloth 2/6
WATCHES AND OTHER TIMEKEEPERS, HISTORY OF. By J. F. Kendal, M.B.H. Inst. £1.50 boards; or cloth £2.50
WATCHMAKER'S HANDBOOK. Intended as a Workshop Companion for those engaged in Watchmaking and the Allied Mechanical Arts. Translated from the French of Claudius Saunier, and enlarged by Julien Tripplin, F.R.A.S., and Edward Rigg, M.A., Assayer in the Royal Mint. Fourth Edition. Cr. 8vo, cloth 9/0
WATCHMAKER'S HANDBOOK. Designed as a Workshop Companion for those involved in watchmaking and related mechanical trades. Translated from the French by Claudius Saunier, and expanded by Julien Tripplin, F.R.A.S., and Edward Rigg, M.A., Assayer at the Royal Mint. Fourth Edition. Cr. 8vo, cloth 9/0
"Each part is truly a treatise in itself. The arrangement is good and the language is clear and concise. It is an admirable guide for the young watchmaker." —Engineering.
"Each part stands alone as a complete essay. The organization is solid, and the language is clear and to the point. It serves as an excellent guide for budding watchmakers." —Engineering.
WEIGHT CALCULATOR. Being a Series of Tables upon a New and Comprehensive Plan, exhibiting at one Reference the Exact Value of any Weight from 1 1b. to 15 tons, at 300 Progressive Rates, from 1d. to 168s. per cwt., and containing 186,000 Direct Answers, which, with their Combinations, consisting of a single addition (mostly to be performed at sight), will afford an aggregate of 10,266,000 Answers; the whole being calculated and designed to ensure correctness and promote despatch. By Henry Harben, Accountant. Sixth edition, carefully corrected. Royal 8vo, strongly half bound £1 5s.
WEIGHT CALCULATOR. This is a series of tables based on a new and comprehensive approach that shows, at a glance, the exact value of any weight from 1 lb to 15 tons, at 300 different rates, from 1d to 168s per cwt. It includes 186,000 direct answers, and with their combinations, consisting of simple additions (mostly done at a glance), it will provide a total of 10,266,000 answers. The entire set is calculated and designed to ensure accuracy and efficiency. By Henry Harben, Accountant. Sixth edition, carefully corrected. Royal 8vo, strongly half bound £1 5s.
"A practical and useful work of reference for men of business generally." —Ironmonger.
"A practical and helpful reference for businesspeople in general." —Ironmonger.
"Of priceless value to business men." —Sheffield Independent.
"Of priceless value to businesspeople." —Sheffield Independent.
HANDYBOOKS FOR HANDICRAFTS.
BY PAUL N. HASLUCK.
BY PAUL N. HASLUCK.
Author of "Lathe Work," etc. Crown 8vo, 144 pp., price 1s. each.
Author of "Lathe Work," etc. Crown 8vo, 144 pages, price 1 shilling each.
☞ These Handybooks have been written to supply information for Workmen Students, and Amateurs in the several Handicrafts, on the actual Practice of the Workshop, and are intended to convey in plain language Technical Knowledge of the several Crafts. In describing the processes employed, and the manipulation of material, workshop terms are used; workshop practice is fully explained; and the text is freely illustrated with drawings of modern tools, appliances, and processes.
☞ These How-to guides have been created to provide information for Employees Learners, and Hobbyists in various Handicrafts, focusing on the actual Practice of the Workshop, and aim to convey in straightforward language Technical Skills of the different Crafting. In explaining the techniques used, and the handling of materials, workshop terms are applied; workshop practices are thoroughly detailed; and the text is well-illustrated with drawings of modern tools, equipment, and methods.
METAL TURNER'S HANDYBOOK. A Practical Manual for Workers at the Foot-Lathe. With 100 Illustrations 1/0
METAL TURNER'S HANDYBOOK. A Practical Guide for Workers at the Foot-Lathe. With 100 Illustrations 1/0
"The book displays thorough knowledge of the subject." —Scotsman.
"The book shows a deep understanding of the topic." —Scotsman.
WOOD TURNER'S HANDYBOOK. A Practical Manual for Workers at the Lathe. With 100 Illustrations 1/0
WOOD TURNER'S HANDYBOOK. A Practical Manual for Lathe Workers. With 100 Illustrations 1/0
"We recommend the book to young turners and amateurs." —Mechanical World.
"We recommend the book to young turners and hobbyists." —Mechanical World.
WATCH JOBBER'S HANDYBOOK. A Practical Manual of Cleaning, Repairing, and Adjusting. With 100 Illustrations 1/0
WATCH JOBBER'S HANDYBOOK. A Practical Manual for Cleaning, Repairing, and Adjusting. With 100 Illustrations 1/0
"All connected with the trade should acquire and study this work." —Clerkenwell Chronicle.
"Everyone involved in the trade should get and review this work." —Clerkenwell Chronicle.
PATTERN MAKER'S HANDYBOOK. A Practical Manual on the Construction of Patterns. With 100 Illustrations 1/0
PATTERN MAKER'S HANDYBOOK. A Practical Guide on How to Build Patterns. With 100 Illustrations 1/0
"A most valuable, if not indispensable, manual for the pattern-maker." —Knowledge.
"A highly valuable, if not essential, guide for the pattern-maker." —Knowledge.
MECHANIC'S WORKSHOP HANDYBOOK. A Practical Manual on Mechanical Manipulation, embracing Information on various Handicraft Processes. With Useful Notes and Miscellaneous Memoranda. Comprising about 200 Subjects 1/0
MECHANIC'S WORKSHOP HANDYBOOK. A Practical Guide on Mechanical Manipulation, covering Information on various Craft Processes. Includes Helpful Notes and Miscellaneous Memoranda. Featuring around 200 Topics 1/0
"Should be found in every workshop, and in all technical Schools." —Saturday Review.
"Should be found in every workshop and in all technical schools." —Saturday Review.
MODEL ENGINEER'S HANDYBOOK. A Practical Manual on the Construction of Model Steam Engines. With upwards of 100 Illustrations 1/0
MODEL ENGINEER'S HANDYBOOK. A Practical Manual on Building Model Steam Engines. With over 100 Illustrations 1/0
"Mr. Hasluck has produced a very good little book." —Builder.
"Mr. Hasluck has created a really great little book." —Builder.
CLOCK JOBBER'S HANDYBOOK. A Practical Manual on Cleaning, Repairing, and Adjusting. With 100 Illustrations 1/0
CLOCK JOBBER'S HANDYBOOK. A Practical Manual on Cleaning, Repairing, and Adjusting. With 100 Illustrations £1.00
"It is of inestimable service to those commencing the trade." —Coventry Standard.
"It is incredibly helpful to those starting in the trade." —Coventry Standard.
CABINET WORKER'S HANDYBOOK. A Practical Manual on the Tools, Materials, Appliances, and Processes employed in Cabinet Work. With upwards of 100 Illustrations 1/0
CABINET WORKER'S HANDYBOOK. A Practical Manual on the Tools, Materials, Equipment, and Techniques Used in Cabinet Work. With over 100 Illustrations 1/0
"Amongst the most practical guides for beginners in cabinet-work." —Saturday Review.
"One of the most useful guides for beginners in cabinet-making." —Saturday Review.
WOODWORKER'S HANDYBOOK. Embracing information on the Tools, Materials, Appliances and Processes Employed in Woodworking. With 104 Illustrations 1/0
WOODWORKER'S HANDYBOOK. This book covers everything about the tools, materials, appliances, and methods used in woodworking. It includes 104 illustrations. 1/0
"Written by a man who knows, not only how work ought to be done, but how to do it, and how to convey his knowledge to others." —Engineering.
"Written by a man who understands not just how work should be done, but how to do it and how to share his knowledge with others." —Engineering.
"Mr. Hasluck writes admirably, and gives complete instructions." —Engineer.
"Mr. Hasluck writes excellently and provides thorough instructions." —Engineer.
"Mr. Hasluck combines the experience of a practical teacher with the manipulative skill and scientific knowledge of processes of the trained mechanician, and the manuals are marvels of what can be produced at a popular price." —Schoolmaster.
"Mr. Hasluck brings together the experience of a hands-on teacher with the practical skills and scientific understanding of a skilled mechanic, and the manuals are impressive examples of what can be created at an affordable price." —Schoolmaster.
"Helpful to workmen of all ages and degrees of experience." —Daily Chronicle.
"Helpful for workers of all ages and levels of experience." —Daily Chronicle.
WEALE'S SCIENTIFIC & TECHNICAL SERIES. | |
MATHEMATICS, ARITHMETIC, &c. | |
Descriptive Geometry. J.F. Heather | 2/- |
Practical Plane Geometry. J.F. Heather | 2/− |
Analytic Geometry. J. Hann & J.R. Young | 2/- |
Geometry.Part I. (Euclid, Bks. I.—III.) H. Law | 1/6 |
Part II. (Euclid, Books IV, V, VI, XI, XII). H. Law | 1/6 |
Geometry, in 1 vol. (Euclid's Elements) | 2/6 |
Plane Geometry. J. Hann | 1/6 |
Spherical Trig. J. Hann | 1/- |
The two volumes above, bound together | 2/6 |
Calculus 101. W. S. B. Woolhouse | 1/6 |
Integral Calculus. H. Cox | 1/6 |
Algebra. J. Haddon | 2/– |
Key to same | 1/6 |
Bookkeeping. J. Haddon | 1/6 |
Math. J.R. Young | 1/6 |
Key to same | 1/6 |
Equation-based Math. W. Hipsley | 1/6 |
Math. J. Haddon | 1/6 |
Math Tools. Heather & Walmisley | 2/- |
Drawing and Measuring Tools. J.F. Heather | 1/6 |
Optical Devices, J.F. Heather | 1/6 |
Surveying & Astronomical Tools. J.F. Heather | 1/6 |
The three volumes mentioned above, bound together. | 4/6 |
Measurement and Dimensions. T. Baker | 1/6 |
Slide Rule, & How to Use It. C. Hoare | 2/6 |
Measurements, Weights, & Money. W. S. B. Woolhouse | 2/6 |
Logarithms: A Treatise with Tables. H. Law | 3/ - |
Compound Interest and Annuities. F. Thoman | 4/- |
Concise Calculator. D. O'Gorman | 2/6 |
Math. F. Campin | 3 out of 5 |
Astronomy. R. Main & W.T. Lynn | 2/- |
Statics and Dynamics. T. Baker | 1/6 |
Surface Measurement. J. Hawking | 3/6 |
CROSBY LOCKWOOD & SON, 7, Stationers' Hall Court, E.C |
WEALE'S SCIENTIFIC & TECHNICAL SERIES. WEALE'S SCIENTIFIC & TECH SERIES. | |
BUILDING & ARCHITECTURE. | |
Real Estate Development. F. Maitland | 2/- |
Building Science. E. W. Tarn | 3/6 |
Architecture. E. Dobson and J.P. Allen | 2/- |
Building Book. Sir E. Beckett | 4/6 |
House Construction. S.H. Brooks | 2/6 |
Cottage Construction. C.B. Allen | 2/ - |
Acoustics in Public Buildings. Prof. T.R. Smith. | 1/6 |
Practical Bricklaying Techniques. A. Hammond | 1/6 |
Brick Cutting & Setting Techniques. A. Hammond | 1/6 |
Masonry. F. Walker | 1/6 |
Brick and Tile Production. E. Dobson | 3/-. |
Practical Brick & Tile Guide. Dobson & Hammond | 6/10 |
Woodworking and Joinery. T. Tredgold & E.W. Tarn | 3/6 |
Atlas of 35 plates related to the above | 6 out of 10 |
Handrails and Stairs. G. Collings | 2/6 |
Circular Carpentry Work. G. Collings | 2/6 |
Roof Framing. G. Collings | 2/- |
Roof Construction. E.W. Tarn | 1/6 |
Joints used by Builders. J.W. Christy | 3 out of 5 |
Support. G.H. Blagrove | 1/6 |
Timber Importer and Builder's Guide. R.E. Grandy | 2/- |
Plumbing. W.P. Buchan | 3/6 |
Building Ventilation. W. P. Buchan | 3/6 |
Practical Plastering. W. Kemp | 2/- |
House Painting. E.A. Davidson | 5 out of 5 |
Basic Decor. J.W. Facey | 2/- |
Home Decor Tips. J.W. Facey | 2/6 |
Gas Fitting. J. Black | 2/6 |
Portland Cement for Everyone. H. Faija & D.B. Butler | 3/- |
Limes, Cements, & Mortars. G.R. Burnell | 1/6 |
Masonry and Stone Cutting. E. Dobson | 2/6 |
Arches, columns, and supports. W. Bland | 1/6 |
Quantities & Measurements. A.C. Beaton | 1/6 |
Complete Measurement Tool. R. Horton | 4/-. |
Surface Measurement. J. Hawking | 3/6 |
Lighting for Architects. E.W. Tarn | 1/6 |
Tips for Young Architects. Wightwick & Guillaume | 3/6 |
Architecture Terms Dictionary. J. Weale | 5 out of 5 |
CROSBY LOCKWOOD & SON, 7, Stationers' Hall Court, E.C. |
WEALE'S SCIENTIFIC & TECHNICAL SERIES. | |
BUILDING & ARCHITECTURE—contd. | |
Architecture, Styles. W.H. Leeds | 1/6 |
Architecture, Styles. T. T. Bury | 2/– |
The two volumes above, bound together. | 3/6 |
Architecture, Design. E.L. Garbett | 2/6 |
The three volumes mentioned above, bound together. | 6/– |
Architectural Modeling. T.A. Richardson | 1/6 |
Vitruvius' Architecture. J. Gwilt | 5/5 |
Greek Architecture. Lord Aberdeen | 1/- |
The two volumes above are bound together. | 6/-. |
FINE ARTS. | |
Artists' Dictionary. P. Daryl | 2/6 |
Art, Visual Arts. T.J. Gullick & J. Timbs | 5/5 |
Coloring Grammar. G. Field & E.A. Davidson | 3/- |
Viewpoint. G. Pyne | 2/- |
Glass Staining & Painting on Glass | 2/6 |
Music. C. C. Spencer | 2/6 |
Piano Lessons. C.C. Spencer | 1/6 |
INDUSTRIAL & USEFUL ARTS. | |
Cements, Pastes, Adhesives & Gums. H.C. Standage | 2/- |
Clocks, Watches, and Alerts. Lord Grimthorpe | 4/6 |
Goldsmith's Guide. G.E. Gee | 3/-. |
Silversmithing Handbook. G. E. Gee | 3 out of 5 |
Goldsmith and Silversmith Handbook. G.E. Gee | 7/– |
Jewelry Hallmarking. G.E. Gee | 2/- |
Cabinet Maker's Handbook. R. Bitmead | 2/6 |
Practical Organ Construction. W.E. Dickson | 2/6 |
Coaching Development. J.W. Burgess | 2/6 |
Brass Founder's Guide. W. Graham | 2/- |
French Polishing and Coating. R. Bitmead | 1/6 |
Home Decor. J.W. Facey | 5/-. |
Easy Letter Painting. J.G. Badenoch | 1/6 |
Shoe and Boot Making. J.B. Leno | 2/- |
Dental Engineering. C. Hunter | 3/− |
Wood Engraving. W.N. Brown | 1/5 |
Laundry Management | 2/- |
CROSBY LOCKWOOD & SON, 7, Stationers' Hall Court, E.C. |
Weale's Science & Tech Series. | |
CIVIL ENGINEERING & SURVEYING. | |
Civil EngineeringH. Law & D. K. Clark | 6/6 |
Pioneer Engineering. E. Dobson | 4/6 |
Moderate Span Iron Bridges.H.W. Pendred | 2/- |
Iron and Steel Bridges & Viaducts.F. Campin | 3/6 |
Construction Steel & Ironwork.F. Campin | 3/6 |
Tube and Beam Bridges.G. D. Dempsey | 2/- |
Materials and Construction.F. Campin | 3 out of 10 |
Sanitation Work.C. Slagg | 3/- |
Roads & Streets.Law, Clark, & Wallis-Tayler | 6/– |
Gasworks construction. S. Hughes & H. O'Connor | 6/− |
Well Drilling.J. G. Swindell & G. R. Burnell | 2/- |
Drainage system.G. D. Dempsey & D. K. Clark | 4/6 |
Blasting and Quarrying. J. Burgoyne | 1/6 |
Foundations and Concrete Construction.E. Dobson | 1/6 |
Pneumatics.C. Tomlinson | 1/6 |
Surveying.T. Baker & F. E. Dixon | 2/- |
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING, &c. | |
Engineering Diagram.J. Maxton | 3/6 |
Fuels, Analysis, and Valuation.H.J. Phillips | 2/- |
Gas.C. W. Williams & D. K. Clark | 3/6 |
Boilermaker Assistant.J. Courtney | 2/- |
Boilermaker's Reference Guide.J. Courtney | 4/– |
Boilermaker's Reference Guide and Helper | 7/- |
Steam Boilers.R. Armstrong | 1/6 |
Steam and Machinery Management.M.P. Bale | 2/6 |
Steam and the Steam Engine.D.K. Clark | 3/6 |
Steam Engine Theory.T. Baker | 1/6 |
Steam Engine. Dr.Lardner | 1/6 |
Train Engines.G. D. Dempsey & D. K. Clark | 3/- |
Train Engine Operation.M. Reynolds | 3/6 |
Stationary Engine Operation.M. Reynolds | 3/6 |
Model Train Engineer. M. Reynolds | 3/6 |
Modern Workshop Practices.J.G. Winton | 3/6 |
Mech Engineering.F. Campin | 2/6 |
Machinery Details.F. Campin | 3/− |
Basic Marine Engineering.J.S. Brewer | 1/6 |
CROSBY LOCKWOOD & SON, 7, Stationers' Hall Court, E.C. |
WEALE'S SCIENTIFIC & TECHNICAL SERIES. | |
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING, &c.—contd. | |
Water's Power. J. Glynn | 2/- |
Mechanisms and Machines. T. Baker & J. Nasmyth | 2/6 |
Mechanics. C. Tomlinson | 1/6 |
Cranes and Equipment. J. Glynn | 1/6 |
Blacksmith and Forge. W.J.E. Crane | 2/6 |
Sheet Metal Worker’s Manual. W.J.E. Crane | 1/6 |
Basic Electric Lighting. A. A. C. Swinton | 1/6 |
MINING & METALLURGY. | |
Mining Calculations. T.A. O'Donahue | 3/6 |
Mineralogy. A. Ramsay | 3/6 |
Coal Mining. Sir W. W. Smyth & T. F. Brown | 3/6 |
Iron Metallurgy. H. Bauerman | 5 out of 5 |
Mineral Surveyor's Handbook. W. Lintern | 3/6 |
Slate and Slate Mining. D.C. Davies | 3- |
Mining and Quarrying. J.H. Collins | 1/6 |
Underground Surveying. T. Fenwick & T. Baker | 2/6 |
Mining Equipment. W. Morgans | 2/6 |
Plates to copy. 4to | 4/6 |
Geology in Action. Portlock & Tate | 2/- |
Geology Through Time. R. Tate | 2/6 |
The two volumes mentioned above are bound together. | 4/6 |
Electro-Metallurgy. A. Watt | 3/6 |
NAVIGATION, SHIPBUILDING, &c. | |
Navigation. J. Greenwood & W. H. Rosser | 2/6 |
Practical Navigation Skills. Greenwood, Rosser & Law | 7 dollars |
Navigation and Astro Navigation. J.R. Young | 2/6 |
Math & Nautical Tables. Law & Young | 4/ |
Masts and Rigging. R. Kipping | 2/- |
Sails and sail production. R. Kipping | 2/6 |
Marine Engines. R. Murray & G. Carlisle | 4/6 |
Nautical Engineering. J. Peake | 3/6 |
Shipbuilding. H. A. Sommerfeld | 1/6 |
Plates to ditto. 4to | 7/6 |
Ships and boats. W. Bland | 1/6 |
CROSBY LOCKWOOD & SON, 7, Stationers' Hall Court, E.C. |
WEALE'S SCIENTIFIC & TECHNICAL SERIES. | |
AGRICULTURE & GARDENING. | |
Fertilizers & Feeding Supplies. Dr. B. Dyer | net $1 |
Draining and Diking. Prof. J. Scott | 1/6 |
Irrigation and Water Supply. Prof. J. Scott | 1/6 |
Farm Roads, Fences, and Gates. Prof.J. Scott | 1/6 |
Farm Structures. Prof. J. Scott | 2/- |
Farm Equipment and Machinery. Prof.J. Scott | 2/- |
Farm Equipment and Machinery. Prof. J. Scott | 2/-. |
Agricultural Surveying. Prof.J. Scott | 1/6 |
The above 7 volumes, bound together | 12 bucks |
Farm Management. R.S. Burn | 2/6 |
Property Management. R.S. Burn | 2/6 |
Farming—Soil, Fertilizers, and Crops. R.S. Burn | 2/- |
Farming - Overview - Agricultural Economy. R.S. Burn | 3/- |
Farming—Cows, Sheep, and Horses. R.S. Burn | 2/6 |
Farming—Dairy, Pork, and Poultry. R.S. Burn | 2/- |
Farming—Wastewater & Irrigation. R. S. Burn | 2/6 |
The five volumes mentioned above, bound together. | 12 bucks |
Bookkeeping for Farmers. J.M. Woodman | 2/6 |
Land Reference Guide. A. Arman | 2/- |
Miller's & Farmer's Ready Reckoner | 2/- |
Hay and Straw Calculator. J. Steele | 2/-. |
Meat Production. J. Ewart | 2/6 |
The Sheep. W.C. Spooner | 3/6 |
Small Space Gardening. S. Woods | 1/- |
Garden Force. S. Wood | 3/6 |
Market and Urban Gardening. C.W. Shaw | 3/— |
Gardening at Home. G. M. F. Glenny | 1/6 |
Cottage garden. E. Hobday | 1/6 |
Garden Recipes. C.W. Quin | 1/6 |
Growing Potatoes: A Guide. J. Pink | 2/- |
Fruit Tree Cultivation. M. Du Breuil | 3/6 |
Tree Planter & Plant Propagator. S. Wood | 2/- |
Tree Trimmer. S. Wood | 1/6 |
Tree Planter, Propagator, & Pruner. S. Wood | 3/6 |
Grafting and Budding. C. Baltet | 2/6 |
Bees for Fun & Profit. G.G. Samson | net $1 |
CROSBY LOCKWOOD & SON, 7, Stationers' Hall Court, E.C. |
Transcriber's notes:
page
1. add period after "the above processes"
16. varnsh corrected to varnish
17. from corrected
18. closing quote added after Polish
31. "polish aud spirits" changed to and
79. added parens close after "finish
81. earthern corrected to earthen
83. boiled-linseed oil corrected to boiled linseed-oil
104. period after coarsely
101. campeachiaum corrected to campeachianum
117. published net added right bracket
118. net added right bracket
118. OF METALS added period
121. added right bracket ]
122. Material [added right bracket] Uses of
124. "Refining"--Power Consumption added dashes
125. added ] in 3 places
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!